Ib 0600411 Engc

INVERTER
FR-F700P
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
FR-F700P
FR-F720P-0.75K to 110K
FR-F740P-0.75K to 560K
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (Basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
1 OUTLINE ........................................................................................................1
1
INVERTER
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ......................................................................3
3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> .............................................................40
4 DRIVING THE MOTOR ................................................................................45 2

5 ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................70
6 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................................115
3
700P
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION......................140
8 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................149
5
For the customers intending to use IPM motors ......... 40
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial settings.
For use with an IPM motor, refer to page 40.
6
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN To obtain the Instruction Manual (Applied)
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction
Manual (Applied) [IB-0600412ENG].
The Instruction Manual (Applied) is separately available from where you
7
FR-F700P
MODEL
purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi sales representative.
MODEL The PDF version of this manual is also available for download at "Mitsubishi
1A2-P39 Electric FA site," the Mitsubishi Electric FA network service on the world wide
CODE
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C(1502)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

web (URL: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa/)
8
C
This Instruction Manual (Basic) provides handling information and precautions for use of the equipment.
Please forward this Instruction Manual (Basic) to the end user.
This section is specifically about safety matters

Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter
2. Fire Prevention CAUTION
until you have read through this Instruction Manual (Basic) and  Inverter must be installed on a nonflammable wall without holes
appended documents carefully and can use the equipment (so that nobody touches the inverter heatsink on the rear side,
correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of etc.). Mounting it to or near flammable material can cause a fire.
the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this  If the inverter has become faulty, the inverter power must be
Instruction Manual (Basic), the safety instruction levels are switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current could cause a
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION". fire.
 Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
WARNING conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
-. Doing so could cause a fire.
 Daily and periodic inspections must be performed as instructed
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
CAUTION conditions, resulting in medium or slight
in the Instruction Manual. If the product is used without receiving
any inspection, it may cause a burst, break, or fire.
injury, or may cause only material damage.
The CAUTION level may even lead to a serious consequence
according to conditions. Both instruction levels must be followed
3. Injury Prevention CAUTION
because these are important to personal safety.  The voltage applied to each terminal must be the ones specified in
the Instruction Manual. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
 The cables must be connected to the correct terminals.
1.Electric Shock Prevention Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
WARNING  Polarity must be correct. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may
 While the inverter power is ON, do not open the front cover or occur.
the wiring cover. Do not run the inverter with the front cover or  While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not
the wiring cover removed. Otherwise you may access the touch the inverter since the inverter will be extremely hot. Doing
exposed high voltage terminals or the charging part of the so can cause burns.
circuitry and get an electric shock.
 Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for 4. Additional Instructions
wiring or periodic inspection. You may accidentally touch the Also the following points must be noted to prevent an accidental failure, injury,
charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock. electric shock, etc.
 Before wiring, inspection or switching EMC filter ON/OFF (1) Transportation and installation
connector, power must be switched OFF. To confirm that, LED
indication of the operation panel must be checked. (It must be
CAUTION
 The product must be transported in correct method that
OFF.) Any person who is involved in wiring, inspection or
switching EMC filter ON/OFF connector shall wait for at least 10 corresponds to the weight. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF and  Do not stack the boxes containing inverters higher than the
check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. number recommended.
The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after  The product must be installed to the position where withstands
power OFF, and it is dangerous. the weight of the product according to the information in the
 This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) Instruction Manual.
must conform to the requirements of national and local safety  Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts
regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class missing. This can result in breakdowns.
1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-point earthed  When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or
(grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance setting dial; it may fall off or fail.
with EN standard must be used.  Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
 Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this  The inverter mounting orientation must be correct.
equipment shall be fully competent to do the work.  Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering the
 The inverter must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you may inverter. That includes screws and metal fragments or other
get an electric shock or be injured. flammable substance such as oil.
 Setting dial and key operations must be performed with dry  As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it
hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an to impact.
electric shock.  The inverter must be used under the following environment:
 Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. Surrounding air
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
 Do not replace the cooling fan while power is ON. It is temperature
Environment
dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is ON. Ambient humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
 Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C *1
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable
wet hands. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. Atmosphere gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
 When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main Maximum 1000m above sea level for
circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is applied to Altitude, vibration standard operation. 5.9m/s2 *2 or less at 10
the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
etc. right after powering OFF to prevent an electric shock. *1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
 IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance *2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 185K or higher.
magnets embedded in the rotor. Motor terminals hold high-  If halogen-based materials (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine,
voltage while the motor is running even after the inverter power etc.) infiltrate into a Mitsubishi product, the product will be
is turned OFF. Before wiring or inspection, the motor must be damaged. Halogen-based materials are often included in
confirmed to be stopped. When the motor is driven by the load in fumigant, which is used to sterilize or disinfest wooden packages.
applications such as fan and blower, a low-voltage manual When packaging, prevent residual fumigant components from
contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and
being infiltrated into Mitsubishi products, or use an alternative
wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is
sterilization or disinfection method (heat disinfection, etc.) for
open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
packaging. Sterilization of disinfection of wooden package should
also be performed before packaging the product.
A-1
(2) Wiring CAUTION CAUTION
 Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge  The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee
suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended to
These devices on the inverter output side may be overheated or install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for overheat
burn out. protection.
 The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the  Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for
motor affects the rotation direction of the motor. frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise the life of
 IPM motor terminals (U, V, W) hold high-voltage while the IPM the inverter decreases.
motor is running even after the power is turned OFF. Before  The effect of electromagnetic interference must be reduced by
using a noise filter or by other means. Otherwise nearby
wiring, the IPM motor must be confirmed to be stopped.
electronic equipment may be affected.
Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Appropriate measures must be taken to suppress harmonics.
 Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply.
Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/
Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals (U,V,
damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
W) of an IPM motor will burn the IPM motor. The IPM motor must  When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, the motor must
be connected with the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter. be an insulation-enhanced motor or measures must be taken to
suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage attributable to the wiring
(3) Test operation and adjustment constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the
insulation of the motor.
CAUTION  When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed, the
 Before starting operation, each parameter must be confirmed
required parameters must be set again before starting
and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause some machines to
operations because all parameters return to the initial value.
make unexpected motions.  The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before
changing its setting, the performances of the motor and machine
must be fully examined.
(4) Operation WARNING  Stop status cannot be hold by the inverter's brake function. In
 The IPM motor capacity must be same with the inverter capacity. addition to the inverter's brake function, a holding device must
(The 0.75K inverter can be used with a one-rank lower MM-EF be installed to ensure safety.
motor.)  Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long
 Do not use multiple IPM motors with one inverter. period, inspection and test operation must be performed.
 Any person must stay away from the equipment when the retry  Static electricity in your body must be discharged before you
function is set as it will restart suddenly after trip. touch the product. Otherwise the product may be damaged.
 Do not connect an IPM motor under the general-purpose motor
 Since pressing key may not stop output depending on the control settings (initial settings). Do not use a general-purpose
motor under the IPM motor control settings. Doing so will cause
function setting status, separate circuit and switch that make an a failure.
emergency stop (power OFF, mechanical brake operation for  In the system with an IPM motor, the inverter power must be
emergency stop, etc.) must be provided. turned ON before closing the contacts of the contactor at the
 OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting output side.
the inverter fault. Resetting inverter alarm with the start signal
ON restarts the motor suddenly.
 Do not use an IPM motor in an application where a motor is (5) Emergency stop CAUTION
driven by its load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum  A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided
motor speed. to prevent hazardous condition to the machine and equipment in
 A dedicated IPM motor must be used under IPM motor control. case of inverter failure.
Do not use a synchronous motor, induction motor, or  When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, the wiring must
synchronous induction motor under IPM motor control. be checked for fault (short circuit), and internal parts of the
 The inverter must be used for three-phase induction motors or inverter for a damage, etc. The cause of the trip must be
the dedicated IPM motor. identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter breaker.
output may damage the equipment.  When any protective function is activated, appropriate corrective
 Do not modify the equipment. action must be taken, and the inverter must be reset before
 Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this resuming operation.
manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
 Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the
control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
(7) Disposing of the inverter

CAUTION
 The inverter must be treated as industrial waste.
General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction Manual
(Basic) show the inverter without a cover or partially open for
explanation. Never operate the inverter in this manner. The cover
must be always reinstalled and the instruction in this Instruction
Manual (Basic) must be followed when operating the inverter.
For more details on a dedicated IPM motor, refer to the Instruction
Manual of the dedicated IPM motor.
A-2
— CONTENTS —
1 OUTLINE 1
CONTENTS
1.1 Product checking and parts identification .................................................................. 1
1.2 Step of operation ........................................................................................................ 2
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3
2.1 Peripheral devices...................................................................................................... 4

2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover............................................. 6
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions................................................................. 8
2.4 Wiring.......................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................... 9
2.4.2 EMC filter................................................................................................................................. 10
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 11
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring ......... 11
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 19
2.4.6 Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 22
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit ............................................................................................................ 24
2.4.8 Mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
on the enclosure surface ......................................................................................................... 25
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 26
2.4.10 Communication operation........................................................................................................ 26
2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units.................................................................... 27
2.5.1 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ................................................................................... 27
2.5.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5) ....................................................................... 29
2.5.3 Connection of the brake unit (BU type) ................................................................................... 31
2.5.4 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) ....................................................... 32
2.5.5 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) ....................................... 33
2.5.6 Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) ..................................................... 34
2.5.7 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) ............................................ 35
2.6 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)............................................................... 36
2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter ........................................................................... 37
2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter ........................................................ 39
3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> 40
3.1 Setting procedure of IPM motor control <IPM>.................................................... 40

3.2 Initializing the parameters required to drive an IPM motor (Pr.998) <IPM> ......... 42
4 DRIVING THE MOTOR 45
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07) ..................................................................................... 45

4.1.1 Component of the operation panel (FR-DU07)........................................................................ 45
4.1.2 Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 46
I
4.1.3 Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)................................................................... 47
4.1.4 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s)) ...................................................... 48
4.1.5 Monitoring of output current and output voltage ...................................................................... 49
4.1.6 First priority monitor ................................................................................................................. 49
4.1.7 Displaying the set frequency.................................................................................................... 49
4.1.8 Changing the parameter setting value..................................................................................... 50
4.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)...........................................51
4.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3)<V/F><S MFVC>..........................52
4.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) .......................................53
4.4.1 Setting the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz) ...................... 53
4.4.2 Using the setting dial like a potentiometer at the operation ..................................................... 55
4.4.3 Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds)..................................... 56
4.4.4 Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input).............................................................. 58
4.4.5 Setting the frequency by analog input (current input) .............................................................. 59
4.5 Start/stop using terminals (External operation) ........................................................60
4.5.1 Setting the frequency by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3) ....................................................... 60
4.5.2 Switching between the automatic operation and the manual operation
(operation by the multi-speed setting and the operation panel) (Pr.79=3) .............................. 62
4.5.3 Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds) (Pr.4 to Pr.6) ............... 64
4.5.4 Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input).............................................................. 66
4.5.5 Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage
input (5V, initial value) ............................................................................................................ 67
4.5.6 Setting the frequency by analog input (current input) .............................................................. 68
4.5.7 Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input
(at 20mA, initial value) ............................................................................................................. 69
5 ADJUSTMENT 70
5.1 Simple mode parameter list......................................................................................70

5.2 Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0) <V/F> .............................................................72
5.3 Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2).......................73
5.4 Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8) .....................................74
5.5 Energy saving operation for fans and pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60) <V/F>.........................75
5.5.1 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ............................................................................................... 75
5.5.2 Energy saving control (Pr.60) ................................................................................................. 75
5.6 Selection of the start command and frequency command sources (Pr. 79)............77
5.7 Parameter clear, all parameter clear ....................................................................78
5.8 Parameter copy and parameter verification .........................................................79
5.8.1 Parameter copy ....................................................................................................................... 79
5.8.2 Parameter verification.............................................................................................................. 80
5.9 Initial value change list .........................................................................................81
5.10 Parameter list .......................................................................................................82
5.10.1 List of parameters classified by the purpose ........................................................................... 82
5.10.2 Display of the extended parameters ........................................................................................ 85
5.10.3 Parameter list........................................................................................................................... 86
II
6 TROUBLESHOOTING 115
CONTENTS
6.1 Reset method of protective function....................................................................... 115
6.2 List of fault or alarm display.................................................................................... 116
6.3 Causes and corrective actions ............................................................................... 117
6.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters...................................... 130
6.5 Check and clear of the faults history .................................................................. 131
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble...................................................................... 133
6.6.1 Motor does not start............................................................................................................... 133
6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise........................................................... 135
6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise........................................................................................ 135
6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally .......................................................................................... 135
6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction .................................................................................. 136
6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting .................................................................................... 136
6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ................................................................................ 136
6.6.8 Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 137
6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 137
6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 138
6.6.11 Motor current is too large....................................................................................................... 138
6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate .................................................................................................... 139
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting.......................................................................................... 139
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit .............................................................................................................. 139
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 140
7.1 Inspection item ....................................................................................................... 140

7.1.1 Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 140
7.1.2 Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 140
7.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection ................................................................................................. 141
7.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 142
7.1.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 144
7.1.6 Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 144
7.1.7 Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 148
8 SPECIFICATIONS 149
8.1 Rating ..................................................................................................................... 149

8.2 Common specifications .......................................................................................... 151
8.3 Outline dimension drawings ................................................................................... 153
8.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 153
8.4 Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-EFS (1500r/min) series] ................................................................................. 162
[MM-THE4 (1500r/min) series]............................................................................... 163
8.6 Specification of high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-EF (1800r/min) series].................................................................................... 164
III
8.7 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure ............................................................165
8.7.1 When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN).................................................... 165
8.7.2 Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740P-185K or higher........................................................ 165
APPENDICES 167
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model

with this inverter ..................................................................................... 167
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series .......................................................................... 167
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100 <EXCELENT> series ................................................. 168
Appendix 2 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives ............................... 169
Appendix 3 Instructions for UL and cUL compliance ............................................... 171
<Abbreviations>
DU: Operation panel (FR-DU07)
PU: Operation panel(FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
Inverter: Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700P series
FR-F700P: Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700P series
Pr.: Parameter Number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation: Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
External operation: Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation: Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and external operation
General-purpose motor: Three-phase induction motor
Standard motor: SF-JR
Constant-torque motor: SF-HRCA
Dedicated IPM motor: High-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (1800r/min specification)
Premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS (1500r/min specification)
The following marks are used to indicate the controls as below.

(Parameters without any mark are valid for all controls.)
Mark Control method Applied motor (control)

V/F V/F control
Three-phase induction motor
Simple magnetic flux (general-purpose motor control)
S MFVC
vector control
Dedicated IPM motor
IPM IPM motor control
(IPM motor control)
<Trademarks>
LONWORKS® is registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
<Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual>

Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (For the control logic, refer to page 22.)
Harmonic suppression guideline

All models of General-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for
consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". ( For further details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied) .)
IV
Product checking and parts identification
1 OUTLINE
1.1 Product checking and parts identification
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to
ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
• Inverter Model
FR - F720P - 5.5 K
Symbol Voltage Class Represents inverter
F720P Three-phase 200V class capacity (kW)
Cooling fan
F740P Three-phase 400V class (Refer to page 145)
RS-485 terminals PU connector

(Refer to page 26) (Refer to page 25)
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of options.)
Voltage/current input switch
(Refer to page 9)
AU/PTC switchover switch
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Refer to page 10)
1
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
(Refer to page 6)
OUTLINE
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
Control circuit
(fault).
terminal block
(Refer to page 11)
Main circuit terminal block Charge lamp
Front cover (Refer to page 19) Lit when power is
(Refer to page 6) supplied to the main
Rating plate circuit (Refer to page 11)
Production year and month
Capacity plate Rating plate
Combed shaped Inverter model
DATE:XXXX-XX
wiring cover FR-F720P-5.5K

Applied motor
(Refer to page 13) capacity
Capacity plate FR-F720P-5.5K Input rating
Output rating
Serial number
Inverter model Serial number
 Accessory · DC reactor supplied (75K or higher)

· Fan cover fixing screws (30K or lower) · Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (37K to 315K)
(Refer to page 169)
Capacity Eyebolt Size Quantity
Capacity Screw Size (mm) Quantity 37K M8 2
2.2K to 5.5K M3 35 1
45K to 160K M10 2
200V
7.5K to 15K M4 40 2

18.5K to 30K M4 50 1 185K to 315K M12 2
3.7K, 5.5K M3 35 1
REMARKS
400V
7.5K to 18.5K M4 40 2

22K, 30K M4 50 1 · For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 6.
 SERIAL number check

Rating plate example The SERIAL consists of one symbol, two characters indicating production year and month, and six
    characters indicating control number.
Symbol Year Month Control number The last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9,
X (October), Y (November), or Z (December.)
SERIAL
1
Step of operation
1.2 Step of operation

The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Frequency command (set frequency) determines the
rotation speed of the motor. Turning ON the start command starts the motor to rotate.
Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
Step
Step of
off operation
op
operation
: Initial setting
Installation/mounting {Refer to page 8}
Frequency
Frequency command Wiring of the power {Refer to page 11}

supply and motor
Inverter
output
frequency
(Hz) Time
Frequency ON (S) Start command using the PU connector and
command How RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in
to give a start
option (Communication)
command?
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied) .
Connect a switch, relay, etc.

Start command with to the control circuit
on the operation panel (PU) terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
How to How to
give a frequency give a frequency
command? command?
Set from the Change frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency

PU (FR-DU07/ setting by a current setting by a voltage
with ON/OFF switches
FR-PU04/FR-PU07). output device output device
connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting) terminals 4 and 5) terminals 2 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
{Refer to page 53} {Refer to page 56} {Refer to page 59} {Refer to page 58}
Set from the Change of frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency

PU (FR-DU07/ setting by a current setting by a voltage
with ON/OFF switches
FR-PU04/FR-PU07). output device output device
connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting) terminals 4 and 5) terminals 2 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
{Refer to page 60} {Refer to page 64} {Refer to page 68} {Refer to page 66}
CAUTION
Check the following points before powering ON the inverter.
· Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 8)
· Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to page 9)
· Check that no load is connected to the motor.
·When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (Refer to
page 51)
·To drive a general-purpose motor with the rated motor frequency of 50Hz, set Pr.3 Base frequency
(Refer to page 52)
2
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Three-phase AC power supply
Programmable Human machine interface
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter. controller
Inverter (FR-F700P)
(Refer to page 149) The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding
air temperature. The surrounding air temperature
should be as low as possible within the permissible
Moulded case circuit
RS-485 terminal block range. Especially when mounting the inverter
breaker (MCCB) inside an enclosure, take cautions of the
or earth leakage circuit The inverter can be connected with a
computer such as a programmable surrounding air temperature. (Refer to page 8)
breaker (ELB), fuse controller and with GOT (human Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter.
The breaker must be selected carefully since The control signal lines must be kept fully away
machine interface).
an inrush current flows in the inverter at
They support Mitsubishi inverter from the main circuit to protect them from noise.
power on.
protocol and Modbus-RTU (binary) (Refer to page 9)
(Refer to page 4) protocol. Refer to page 10 for the built-in EMC filter.
Magnetic contactor(MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety.
Do not use this MC to frequently start and stop the
inverter.
Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shortened.
(Refer to page 4)
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)

Install reactors to suppress harmonics and to
improve the power factor. An AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(option) is required when installing the inverter near
a large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors.
Select the reactor according to the model.
For the 55K or lower, remove the jumpers across
terminals P/+ and P1 to connect to the DC reactor.
(Refer to Chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
EMC filter
2
(ferrite core)
AC reactor (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
(FR-HAL) Install an EMC filter (ferrite
core) to reduce the
DC reactor IM connection IPM connection electromagnetic noise
(FR-HEL) P/+ P1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P/+ N/- generated from the inverter.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING

U V W U VW
EMC filter For the 75K or higher, a Effective in the range from
DC reactor is supplied.
Earth
(ferrite core) about 0.5MHz to 5MHz.
Always install the reactor. (Ground)
(FR-BLF) A wire should be wound four
The 55K or lower has a built-in (Refer to page 35) turns at a maximum.
common mode choke.
(Refer to Chapter 3 of (Refer to Chapter 3 of the
the Instruction Manual (Applied) .) Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
Contactor
Example) No-fuse
switch (DSN type)
Brake unit Install a contactor in an
(FR-BU2) application where the IPM
motor is driven by the load
even at power-OFF of the
inverter. Do not open or
close the contactor while
General- the inverter is running
P/+ PR purpose Earth (outputting).
P/+ motor (Ground)
PR Dedicated IPM motor
Power regeneration (MM-EFS, MM-THE4,
Devices connected
common converter MM-EF)
High power factor Resistor unit to the output
(FR-CV*1) Do not install a power Earth Use the specified motor.
converter Power regeneration (FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2) IPM motors cannot be driven
factor correction capacitor, (Ground)
(FR-HC2) converter (MT-RC*2) The regeneration braking surge suppressor or EMC filter (capacitor) on the by the commercial power
Power supply harmonics Greater braking capability capability of the inverter can be output side of the inverter. supply.
can be greatly suppressed. is obtained. exhibited fully. When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on (Refer to page 162 and 164)
Install this as required. Install this as required. Install this as required. the output side of the inverter, contact each
(Refer to page 32) (Refer to page 33 and 34) (Refer to page 27) manufacturer for selection of the moulded case
*1 Compatible with the 55K or lower. circuit breaker.
*2 Compatible with the 75K or higher.
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth
: Install these options as required. (ground) the motor and inverter.
CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. This will
cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected,
immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
· Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
· An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
· An IPM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the
motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the
inverter power is ON and the motor is stopped.
3
Peripheral devices
2.1 Peripheral devices

Check the inverter model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to
the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) *2
Motor or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB) Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Applicable Inverter (NF or NV type)
Output (kW) Model
*1 Power factor improving (AC or DC) reactor
Without With Without With
0.75 FR-F720P-0.75K 10A 10A S-N10 S-N10
1.5 FR-F720P-1.5K 15A 15A S-N10 S-N10
2.2 FR-F720P-2.2K 20A 15A S-N10 S-N10
3.7 FR-F720P-3.7K 30A 30A S-N20, S-N21 S-N10
5.5 FR-F720P-5.5K 50A 40A S-N25 S-N20, S-N21
7.5 FR-F720P-7.5K 60A 50A S-N25 S-N25
11 FR-F720P-11K 75A 75A S-N35 S-N35
15 FR-F720P-15K 125A 100A S-N50 S-N50
18.5 FR-F720P-18.5K 150A 125A S-N65 S-N50
22 FR-F720P-22K 175A 150A S-N80 S-N65
30 FR-F720P-30K 225A 175A S-N95 S-N80
37 FR-F720P-37K 250A 225A S-N150 S-N125
45 FR-F720P-45K 300A 300A S-N180 S-N150
55 FR-F720P-55K 400A 350A S-N220 S-N180
75 FR-F720P-75K  400A  S-N300
90 FR-F720P-90K  400A  S-N300
110 FR-F720P-110K  500A  S-N400
*1 Assumes the use of a dedicated IPM motor or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV M
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
directly power supplied. MCCB INV M
For installation in the United States or Canada, select a fuse in accordance with UL, cUL, the National
Electrical Code and any applicable local codes, or use UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB).
(Refer to page 171.)
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor, select an
MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
CAUTION
 When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cable and reactor according to the motor output.
 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
4
Peripheral devices
400V class
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) *2
Motor or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB) Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Output Applicable Inverter (NF or NV type)
(kW) Model
Power factor improving (AC or DC) reactor
*1
Without With Without With
0.75 FR-F740P-0.75K 5A 5A S-N10 S-N10
1.5 FR-F740P-1.5K 10A 10A S-N10 S-N10
2.2 FR-F740P-2.2K 10A 10A S-N10 S-N10
3.7 FR-F740P-3.7K 20A 15A S-N10 S-N10
5.5 FR-F740P-5.5K 30A 20A S-N20, S-N21 S-N11, S-N12
7.5 FR-F740P-7.5K 30A 30A S-N20, S-N21 S-N20, S-N21
11 FR-F740P-11K 50A 40A S-N20, S-N21 S-N20, S-N21
15 FR-F740P-15K 60A 50A S-N25 S-N20, S-N21
18.5 FR-F740P-18.5K 75A 60A S-N25 S-N25
22 FR-F740P-22K 100A 75A S-N35 S-N25
30 FR-F740P-30K 125A 100A S-N50 S-N50
37 FR-F740P-37K 150A 125A S-N65 S-N50
45 FR-F740P-45K 175A 150A S-N80 S-N65
55 FR-F740P-55K 200A 175A S-N80 S-N80
75 FR-F740P-75K  225A  S-N95
90 FR-F740P-90K  225A  S-N150
110 FR-F740P-110K  225A  S-N180
132 FR-F740P-132K  400A  S-N220
150 FR-F740P-160K  400A  S-N300
160 FR-F740P-160K  400A  S-N300
185 FR-F740P-185K  400A  S-N300 2
220 FR-F740P-220K  500A  S-N400
250 FR-F740P-250K  600A  S-N600

280 FR-F740P-280K  600A  S-N600
315 FR-F740P-315K  700A  S-N600
355 FR-F740P-355K  800A  S-N600
400 FR-F740P-400K  900A  S-N800
1000A
450 FR-F740P-450K  1000A 
Rated product
1000A
500 FR-F740P-500K  1200A 
Rated product
1200A
560 FR-F740P-560K  1500A 
Rated product
*1 Assumes the use of a dedicated IPM motor or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV M
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
directly power supplied. MCCB INV M
For installation in the United States or Canada, select a fuse in accordance with UL, cUL, the National
Electrical Code and any applicable local codes, or use UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB). (Refer to
page 171.)
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor, select an
MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
CAUTION
 When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cable and reactor according to the motor output.
 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
5
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover

Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel. 2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel
(These screws cannot be removed.) and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the
operation panel. (Tightening torque: 0.40N·m to 0.45N·m)
30K or lower
Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the 2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an
front cover. installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover Front cover
Installation hook
Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of 2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, 3) Tighten the installation
the front cover into the sockets of the securely press the front cover screws and fix the front
inverter. against the inverter. cover.
(Although installation can be done
with the operation panel mounted,
make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)
Front cover Front cover

Front cover
6
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
37K or higher
Removal
1) Remove installation screws on 2) Loosen the installation 3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to
the front cover 1 to remove the screws of the front cover 2. remove by pushing an installation
front cover 1. hook on the right side using left
fixed hooks as supports.
Installation hook
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the 2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely
front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter. press the front cover 2 against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done with the
operation panel mounted, make sure that a
connector is securely fixed.)

Front cover 2 Front cover 2
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the 4) Fix the front cover 1 with the
installation screws. installation screws.
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
REMARKS
 For the FR-F740P-185K or higher, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
CAUTION
 Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
 The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the
front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
7
Installation of the inverter and instructions
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions

 Installation of the Inverter
Installation on the enclosure CAUTION
0.75K to 30K 37K or higher
 When encasing multiple inverters, install them in
parallel as a cooling measure.
 Install the inverter vertically.
Vertical
Refer to the cleara

nces below.
Fix six points for the FR-F740P-185K
to 400K and fix eight points for the
FR-F740P-450K to 560K.
 Install the inverter under the following conditions.

Surrounding air temperature and humidity Clearances (front) Clearances (side)
Measurement 55K or lower 75K or higher

position
5cm Inverter 5cm
10cm or more 20cm or more
5cm 5cm 10cm 10cm
Measurement 5cm or more * or more * or more or more 5cm Inverter
position or more
*
Temperature: -10°C to 50°C

10cm or more 20cm or more *1cm or more for 3.7K or lower
Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances as a *1cm or more for 3.7K or lower
cooling measure.
REMARKS
 For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-F740P-185K or higher, 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter.
Refer to page 145 for fan replacement.
 The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following
conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
Vibration(5.9m/s2 * or more at 10 to Horizontal placement

55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)) High temperature,
Direct sunlight * 2.9m/s2 or more for the 185K or
higher
high humidity
Vertical mounting Transportation by Oil mist, flammable

(When installing two or holding the front cover gas, corrosive gas, Mounting to
more inverters, install fluff, dust, etc. combustible material
them in parallel.)
8
Wiring
2.4 Wiring
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL) *1 Resistor unit
Sink logic *6. A CN8 (for MT-BU5)
Be sure to connect the DC reactor (Option)
supplied with the 75K or higher. connector is provided
Main circuit terminal Brake unit
When a DC reactor is connected with the 75K or higher.
to the 55K or lower, remove the (Option)
Control circuit terminal Earth
jumper across P1 and P/+. Jumper Jumper
(ground) *7. Do not use PR and PX terminals.
Please do not remove the jumper
connected to terminal PR and PX.
MCCB MC P1 P/+ PR*7 PX*7 N/- CN8*6
U Motor
R/L1 Inrush current
Three-phase AC S/L2 limit circuit V
power supply M
T/L3 W
ONEMC filter Earth
R1/L11 ON/OFF (ground)
Jumper
*2 S1/L21 OFF connector *8 cable
*2. To supply power to the *8. The 200V class 0.75K and 1.5K
control circuit separately, Earth Main circuit are not provided with the ON/OFF
remove the jumper across (Ground) connector EMC filter.
R1/L11 and S1/L21. Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C1 Relay output
Terminal functions vary Forward STF
with the input terminal rotation Terminal functions
assignment start B1 vary with the output
Reverse STR Relay output 1 terminal assignment
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the rotation A1 (Fault output) (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Instruction Manual (Applied))
start STOP (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual
Start self-holding selection C2 (Applied))
RH
High speed
B2
Multi-speed RM Relay output 2
Middle speed
selection A2
RL
Low speed
JOG RUN Open collector output
2
Jog operation Running
Terminal functions
RT SU vary with the output
Second function selection Up to frequency terminal assignment
MRS IPF (Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Instantaneous (Refer to Chapter 4 of
Output stop

*3. AU terminal can be power failure the Instruction Manual
used as PTC input RES *3 OL (Applied))
terminal. Reset Overload
AU
AU FU
Terminal 4 input selection Frequency detection
(Current input selection)
SOURCE
Selection of automatic restart CS PTC SE Open collector output common

SINK
after instantaneous
power failure Sink/source common
SD
Contact input common 24V
*9. It is not necessary
24VDC power supply PC PU when calibrating the
(Common for external power supply transistor) *4 Voltage/current connector
indicator from the
operation panel.
input switch
4 2 + Indicator
- (Frequency
Frequency setting signal (Analog) 10E(+10V) meter, etc.)
ON FM
10(+5V) OFF Calibration
Frequency setting 3 Moving-coil type
2 0 to 5VDC Initial value SD resistor *9 1mA full-scale
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC
1/2W1k selectable *4
0 to 20mADC
*5 1 5
(Analog common) AM (+)
Analog signal output
*4. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog Initial 5 (0 to 10VDC)
0 to ±10VDC value (-)
input specifications switchover Auxiliary (+) 1
(Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the input (-) 0 to ±5VDC selectable *4
voltage/current input switch in Initial TXD+ RS-485 terminals
the OFF position to select Terminal 4 to 20mADC value
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC
selectable *4
TXD- Data transmission
10V) and ON to select current (-) 0 to 10VDC
(Current
input (0 to 20mA). RXD+
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the input) Connector
Instruction Manual RXD- Data reception
for plug-in option
(Applied))
connection SG
GND
*5. It is recommended to use
2W1k when the Option connector 1 Terminating
frequency setting signal is resistor VCC 5V (Permissible load
changed frequently.
current 100mA)
CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables. Also separate the
main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc. take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
· Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
9
Wiring
2.4.2 EMC filter

This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and common mode choke.
The EMC filter is effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF). To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position.
The input side common mode choke, built-in the 55K or lower inverter, is always valid regardless of ON/OFF of the
EMC filter ON/OFF connector.
5.5K or lower 15K or higher

7.5K, 11K
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON
(initial setting) (initial setting) (initial setting)
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K FR-F720P-15K FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K FR-F720P-37K or higher

FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K FR-F740P-22K, 30K FR-F740P-37K or higher
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector
U V W
The FR-F720P-0.75K and 1.5K are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always ON)
<How to disconnect the connector>
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait
for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like. (For the front cover removal method, refer to page 6.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or
forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.
EMC filter Disengage connector fixing tab. With tab disengaged,

ON/OFF connector pull up connector straight.
(Side view)
CAUTION
 Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
 Enabling (turning ON) the EMC filter increases leakage current. (Refer to Chapter 3 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
WARNING
While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
10
Wiring
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal

Terminal Refer to
Terminal Name Description
Symbol Page
Connect to the commercial power supply.
R/L1,
Keep these terminals open when using the high power
S/L2, AC power input 11
factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration
T/L3
common converter (FR-CV).
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or dedicated
U, V, W Inverter output 11
IPM motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/
L2. To retain the fault display and fault output or when
using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV), remove the
jumpers from terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, and S/L2 and
R1/L11, Power supply for S1/L21, and apply external power to these terminals.
The power capacity necessary when separate power is 17
S1/L21 control circuit
supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the
inverter capacity.
15K or lower 18.5K 22K or higher
200V class 60VA 80VA 80VA
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU and MT-

Brake unit BU5), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV),
P/+, N/- 27
connection high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power
regeneration converter (MT-RC).
2
For the 55K or lower, remove the jumper across terminals
P/+ and P1, and connect the DC reactor (FR-HEL). (Be
DC reactor sure to connect the DC reactor supplied with the 75K or

P/+, P1 35
connection higher.)
When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across
terminals P/+ and P1 should not be removed.
PR, PX Please do not remove or use terminals PR and PX or the jumper connected. —
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be
Earth (ground) 16
earthed (grounded).
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring
FR-F720P-0.75K, 1.5K FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K

FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K
Jumper
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 PR
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/- P/+ PX

R1/L11 S1/L21 PX
M
Power supply Motor Charge lamp Charge lamp
M
Power Motor
supply
11
Wiring
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K FR-F720P-15K

FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
N/- P/+ PR Jumper P/+
Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21
PX
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
M M
Power supply Motor Power supply Motor
FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K FR-F720P-37K to 55K

FR-F740P-22K, 30K FR-F740P-37K to 55K
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
Jumper
M
Power supply Motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

Jumper
M
Power supply Motor
FR-F740P-75K to 110K FR-F720P-75K to 110K

FR-F740P-132K to 220K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
R1/L11 S1/L21
Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+ P/+
M M
Power Power supply Motor
Motor
supply For option DC reactor
DC reactor
12
Wiring
FR-F740P-250K to 560K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+
M
Power supply Motor
DC reactor
CAUTION
· The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.) Never connect
the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
· Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning ON the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the 2
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
· When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the 250K or higher, tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor. When
wiring two wires, place wires on both sides of the conductor. (Refer to the drawing below.) For wiring, use bolts (nuts) provided

with the inverter.
 Handling of the wiring cover

(FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K, FR-F740P-22K, 30K)
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary
parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
CAUTION
Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where
no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more),
protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type
(IP00).
13
Wiring
(1) Cable size and other specifications of the main circuit terminals and the earthing terminal
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Crimping Cable Size

Terminal Tightening Terminal 2
HIV, etc. (mm ) *1 AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Applicable
Screw Torque Earthing Earthing
Inverter Model R/L1, R/L1, R/L1, R/L1,
Size *4 N·m S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-F720P-0.75K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
to 2.2K
FR-F720P-3.7K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-F720P-5.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
FR-F720P-7.5K M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16
FR-F720P-11K M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
FR-F720P-15K M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 6 (*5) 25 25 16
FR-F720P-18.5K M6 4.4 38-6 38-6 38 38 38 14 2 2 35 35 25
FR-F720P-22K M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
FR-F720P-30K M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F720P-37K M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-F720P-45K M10 (M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F720P-55K M10 (M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F720P-75K M12 (M10) 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 150 38 250 250   
FR-F720P-90K M12 (M10) 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 2100 38 24/0 24/0   
FR-F720P-110K M12 (M10) 24.5 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0   
*1 The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
*2 The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the
surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
*3 For the 15K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 18.5K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
*4 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 22K or higher is indicated in parentheses.
*5 When connecting the option unit to P/+, P1, N/-, use THHN cables for the option and terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W.
14
Wiring
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)

Crimping Cable Size
(Compression) 2
Applicable
Terminal Tightening
Terminal HIV, etc. (mm ) *1 AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Screw Torque
Inverter Model R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
Size *4 N·m
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-F740P-0.75K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
to 3.7K
FR-F740P-5.5K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
FR-F740P-7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-F740P-11K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
FR-F740P-15K M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
FR-F740P-18.5K M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
FR-F740P-22K M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-F740P-30K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F740P-37K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F740P-45K M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
FR-F740P-55K M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F740P-75K M8 (M10) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F740P-90K M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 3/0 3/0 50 50 25
FR-F740P-110K M10 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 100 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-F740P-132K M10 (M12) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F740P-160K M10 (M12) 14.7 150-10 150-10 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70
FR-F740P-185K M12 (M10) 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 2100 38 300 300 150 150 95
FR-F740P-220K M12 (M10) 24.5 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2100 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95
FR-F740P-250K M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2100 2100 2125 60 24/0 24/0 295 295 95
FR-F740P-280K M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2125 2125 2125 60 2250 2250 2120 2120 120
FR-F740P-315K M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2150 2150 2150 60 2300 2300 2150 2150 150
FR-F740P-355K M12 (M10) 46 200-12 200-12 2200 2200 2200 100 2350 2350 2185 2185 295
FR-F740P-400K M12 (M10) 46 C2-200 C2-200 2200 2200 2200 100 2400 2400 2185 2185 295 2
FR-F740P-450K M12 (M10) 46 C2-250 C2-250 2250 2250 2250 100 2500 2500 2240 2240 2120
FR-F740P-500K M12 (M10) 46 C2-250 C2-250 2250 2250 3200 2100 2500 2500 2240 2240 2120

FR-F740P-560K M12 (M10) 46 C2-200 C2-200 3200 3200 3200 2100 3350 3350 3185 3185 2150
*1 For the 55K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable)) with continuous maximum
permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)) with
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an
enclosure.
*2 For the 45K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
*3 For the 45K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. Assumes
that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the Europe.)
*4 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
The screw size of the terminals P/+, N/-, and P1 in 75K is indicated in parentheses.
The screw size of the option connecting terminal P/+ in 132K and 160K is indicated in parentheses.
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 185K or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:

3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
Line voltage drop [V]=
1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
CAUTION
· Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
· Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
15
Wiring
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding)

• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be earthed (grounded). This
inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
• Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter.
(Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
• Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in page
14 and minimize the cable length. The earthing (grounding) point should be as close as possible to the inverter.
To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), earth (ground) the inverter according to
the instructions on page 169.
(3) Total wiring length

Under general-purpose motor control
Connect one or more general-purpose motors within the total wiring length shown in the following table.
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Setting
0.75K 1.5K 2.2K or Higher
(carrier frequency)
2 (2kHz) or lower 300m 500m 500m
3 (3kHz) or higher 200m 300m 500m
Total wiring length when using a general-purpose motor (2.2K or higher)
300m
500m or less 300m
300m + 300m = 600m
REMARKS
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. Take the following measures 1) or 2) in this case.
Under general-purpose motor control
1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency
selection according to wiring length.
Wiring Length
50m or less 50m to 100m exceeding 100m
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection 15 (14.5kHz) or lower 9 (9kHz) or lower 4 (4kHz) or lower
2) Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) to the 55K or lower and the sine wave filter
(MT-BSL/BSC) to the 75K or higher on the inverter output side.
Refer to Chapter 3 of the Instruction Manual (Applied) for the detail.
Under IPM motor control

Use the following length of cable or shorter when connecting an IPM motor.
Pr. 72 setting 2.2K or
Voltage class Cable type 0.75K 1.5K
(carrier frequency) higher
Unshielded cable 0 (2kHz) to 15 (14kHz) 100m 100m 100m
200V 5 (2kHz) or lower 75m 100m 100m
Shielded cable
Unshielded cable 6 to 9 (6kHz) 50m 50m 100m
400V
Shielded cable 6 to 9 (6kHz) 50m 50m 100m
Use one dedicated IPM motor for one inverter. Multiple IPM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
16
Wiring
CAUTION
· Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault
of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function.
(For Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied). (When using an optional
sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the 75K or higher, set "25" in Pr.72 (2.5kHz). (Sine wave filter can be only used with a general-
purpose motor.)
· The surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) option and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used under
IPM motor control, so do not connect them.
· For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the
manual of each option.
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21)
· Terminal screw size: M4
· Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
· Tightening torque: 1.5N·m
(5) When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply
<Connection diagram> When fault occurs, opening of the electromagnetic contactor (MC) on the
MC inverter power supply side results in power loss in the control circuit,
R/L1 Inverter disabling the fault output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are
S/L2 provided for when retention of a fault signal is required. In this case, connect
the power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit to the
T/L3
primary side of the MC.
R1/L11
Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing so may 2
S1/L21 damage the inverter.
Remove the jumper

FR-F720P-0.75K to 5.5K, FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K
1) Loosen the upper screws.

2) Remove the lower screws. 3)
3) Remove the jumper
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the lower terminals 1)
(R1/L11, S1/L21). R/L1
S/L2
2) T/L3
R1/L11
4) S1/L21
R1/L11
S1/L21
Main circuit terminal block
17
Wiring
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K, FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K

1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws. 3)
3) Remove the jumper.
4) Connect the separate power
1)
supply cable for the control
circuit to the upper terminals R1/L11 R1/L11
S1/L21
S1/L21
(R1/L11, S1/L21). 2)
4)
R/
L1 S/
L2 T/
L3
Main circuit
terminal block
FR-F720P-15K, FR-F740P-15K or higher

1) Remove the upper screws.
R1/ S1/
2) Remove the lower screws. L11 L21 Power supply 3)
3) Pull the jumper toward you to terminal block
remove. for the control circuit
Power supply terminal block
4) Connect the separate power supply for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3
cable for the control circuit to the R1/L11
upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21). S1/L21
MC
Main power supply 1)

2)
4)
FR-F720P-15K FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K FR-F720P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K FR-F740P-22K, 30K FR-F740P-37K or higher
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
U V W
CAUTION
· Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, and S/L2 and S1/L21 removed when supplying
power from other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
· The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC.
· The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.
15K or lower 18.5K 22K or higher
· If the main circuit power is switched OFF (for 0.1s or more) then ON again, the inverter resets and a fault output will not be held.
18
Wiring
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
(1) Input signals

Terminal Terminal Rated Refer to
Type
Description
Symbol Name Specifications Page
Forward Turn ON the STF signal to start forward When the STF and
STF
rotation start rotation and turn it OFF to stop. STR signals are turned
60
Reverse Turn ON the STR signal to start reverse ON simultaneously, the
STR stop command is given.
rotation start rotation and turn it OFF to stop.
Start self-
STOP holding Turn ON the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal. *2
selection
RH, Multi-speed Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH,
64
RM, RL selection RM and RL signals.
Jog mode Turn ON the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting)
JOG *2
selection and turn ON the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation.
Turn ON the RT signal to select second function.
Second
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and
RT function *2
"second V/F (base frequency)" are set, turning ON the RT signal
selection
selects these functions. Input resistance
Turn ON the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter 4.7k
output. Voltage at
MRS Output stop *2
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by opening 21 to
electromagnetic brake. 27VDC
Use to reset fault output provided when fault occurs. Current at short-
Turn ON the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it OFF. circuited 4 to 2
RES Reset In the initial status, reset is set always-enabled. By setting Pr.75, 6mADC 115
reset can be set enabled only at fault occurrence. Inverter
recovers about 1s after the reset is released.

Terminal 4 is valid only when the AU signal is turned ON. (The
Contact input
Terminal 4 frequency setting signal can be set between 0 and 20mADC.)

68
input selection Turning the AU signal ON makes terminal 2 (voltage input)
AU invalid.
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of
PTC input the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC *2
switch to PTC.
Selection of When the CS signal is left ON, the inverter restarts automatically at
automatic power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this
CS restart after operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled. *2
instantaneous (Refer to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time in Chapter 4 of the Instruction
power failure Manual (Applied).)
Contact input
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal
common (sink)
FM.
(initial setting)
External Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a
SD transistor transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a -------------------- —
common programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
(source) undesirable currents.
24VDC power Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
supply common Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
External Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a
transistor transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a
common (sink) programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by Power supply
(initial setting) undesirable currents. voltage range
PC Contact input 19.2 to 28.8VDC 23
common Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic). Permissible load
(source) current 100mA
24VDC power
Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
supply
19
Wiring
Terminal Terminal Rated Refer to

Type
Description
Symbol Name Specifications Page
10VDC
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial
10E Permissible load *2
Frequency status, connect it to terminal 10.
Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it current 10mA
setting power
supply to terminal 10E. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection in Chapter 4 5VDC
10 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).) Permissible load 58, 66
current 10mA
Voltage input:
Input resistance
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the 10k± 1k
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input Maximum
Frequency permissible
and output proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch from among input 0
2 setting voltage 20VDC 58, 66
to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA.
(voltage) Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select Current input:
current input (0 to 20mA).*1 Input resistance
245± 5
Frequency setting
Maximum
permissible
current 30mA
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the Voltage/current
maximum output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and input switch
output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU 4 2
Frequency signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch
4 setting from among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 59, 68
(current) 10VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position
to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).*1
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).) Switch 1
Switch 2
Input resistance
Frequency Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal 10k± 1k
1 setting 2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between the Maximum *2
auxiliary input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting). permissible voltage
± 20VDC
Frequency
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
5 setting -------------------- ------
and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground).
common
*1 Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage signal with voltage/current input switch ON (current input is selected) or a current signal with switch OFF (voltage input is
selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of signal output devices.
*2 Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
20
Wiring
(2) Output signals

Refer
Terminal Terminal
Type
Description Rated Specifications to

Symbol Name
Page
1 changeover contact output indicates that the
inverter’s protective function has activated and the
A1, output stopped.
Relay output 1
B1, Fault: No conduction between B and C (conduction *
(Fault output) between A and C) Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A
C1
Relay
Normal: Conduction between B and C (No conduction (Power factor=0.4)

between A and C) 30VDC 0.3A
A2,
B2, Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output *
C2
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is
Inverter equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial
RUN *
running value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC
injection brake operation.
Switched low when the output
frequency reaches within the range Permissible load 24VDC
Up to of ±10% (initial value) of the set (27VDC maximum) 0.1A
SU *
frequency frequency. Switched high during (A voltage drop is 3.4V
acceleration/deceleration and at a
stop. maximum when the signal is
Open collector
ON.)
Switched low when stall prevention is
Overload activated by the stall prevention
OL Low is when the open collector *
warning function. Switched high when stall Alarm code
prevention is cancelled. (4 bits) output output transistor is ON
Switched low when an instantaneous (conducts).
Instantaneous High is when the transistor is
IPF power failure and under voltage *
power failure protections are activated. OFF (does not conduct).
Switched low when the inverter
output frequency is equal to or higher 2
Frequency
FU than the preset detected frequency *
detection and high when less than the preset
detected frequency.

Open collector
SE Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU -------------------- -----
output common
Select one e.g. output frequency Output item:
Pulse
from monitor items. (Not output Output Permissible load current 2mA
FM For meter *
during inverter reset.) frequency 1440 pulses/s at full scale
The output signal is proportional to (initial setting)
the magnitude of the corresponding
monitoring item. Output item: Output signal 0 to 10VDC
Analog
Analog signal To set a full-scale value for Output Permissible load current 1mA
AM *
output monitoring the output frequency and frequency (load impedance 10k or
the output current, set Pr.55 and (initial setting) more) Resolution 8 bits
Pr.56. *
* Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
(3) Communication
Terminal Terminal Refer to
Type
Description
Symbol Name Page
With the PU connector, communication can be established through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
PU Conforming standard : EIA-485 (RS-485)
— Transmission format : Multidrop link
25
connector
Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
Overall length : 500m
RS-485
TXD+ Inverter
RS-485 terminals
transmission
TXD- With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be established through RS-485.
terminal Conforming standard : EIA-485 (RS-485)
RXD+ Inverter Transmission format : Multidrop link 26
reception Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
RXD- terminal Overall length : 500m
SG Earth (Ground)
21
Wiring
2.4.6 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the
other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to
source logic (SOURCE).
Jumper connector
3) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
 Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
 While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
22
Wiring
4) Sink logic and source logic

 In sink logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
 In source logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected when source logic is selected
Sink logic Source logic

PC
Current Sink
STF Current
connector
R STF
R Source
connector
STR
R STR
R
SD
Inverter DC input (sink type) Inverter DC input (source type)

<Example: QX40> <Example: QX80>
RUN TB1 RUN TB1

R R
R R
SE - + TB17 SE + - TB18
24VDC 24VDC 2
Current flow Current flow
 When using an external power supply for transistor output

 Sink logic type  Source logic type
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of
the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power the inverter with terminal +24V of the external power
supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC
power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in power supply, do not install an external power supply in
the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a
malfunction due to undesirable current.) malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
QY40P type transistor Inverter QY80 type transistor Inverter

output unit output unit
TB1 STF 24VDC PC
(SD)
TB1 STF 24VDC
TB2 STR
(SD)
TB2 STR
Constant TB17
voltage Constant
PC
24VDC
circuit voltage
Fuse TB17
TB18 circuit
TB18 SD
24VDC SD
Current flow Current flow
23
Wiring
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit

(1) Control circuit terminal layout
Control circuit terminal

A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4 Terminal screw size: M3.5
Tightening torque: 1.2N·m
RL RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM AM 1
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD SD STF STR JOG CS PC
(2) Common terminals of the control circuit (SD 5, SE)

 Terminals SD, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Do not
earth(ground) these terminals. Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
 Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STOP, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS,
RES, AU, CS) and the pulse train output terminal (FM). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control
circuit by photocoupler.
 Terminal 5 is a common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. It
should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
 Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU). The contact input
circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
(3) Signal inputs by contactless switches

The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STOP, External signal input using transistor
RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS) can be controlled +24V
using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown on the
right.
STF, etc
Inverter
SD
(4) Wiring instructions

 It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the
cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
 The maximum wiring length should be 30m (200m for terminal FM).
 When using contact inputs, use two or more parallel micro-signal
contacts or twin contacts to prevent a contact faults since the control
circuit input signals are micro-currents.
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts
 To suppress EMI, use shielded or twisted cables for the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main
and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit). For the cables connected to the control circuit
terminals, connect their shields to the common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal. When connecting
external power supply to the terminal PC, however, connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side
of the external power supply. Do not directly earth (ground) the shield to the enclosure, etc.
 Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
24
Wiring
 Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or higher

For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or higher, separate away from wiring of the main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
<Wiring>
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with

a cutter knife and such.
2.4.8 Mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
on the enclosure surface
Having an operation panel or a parameter unit on the enclosure surface is convenient.

With a connection cable, you can mount the operation panel (FR-DU07) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) to the
enclosure surface, and connect it to the inverter.
Use the option FR-CB2, or connectors and cables available on the market.
(For mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07), the optional connector (FR-ADP) is required.) 2
Securely insert one end of connection cable until the stoppers are fixed.

Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)
Parameter unit (FR-PU07) Operation panel(FR-DU07)

(option)
STF FWD PU
Operation panel connection connector

(FR-ADP)(option)
CAUTION
Do not connect the cable to a LAN port of a personal computer, to a fax modem socket, or to a telephone connector. Doing so may
damage the inverter and the connected device due to the differences in the electric specifications.
REMARKS
 Refer to page 6 for the removal of the operation panel.
 Overall wiring length when the operation panel is connected: 20m
 Parameter unit connection cables can be also fabricated with the communication connectors and communication cables listed in
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
25
Wiring
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block

 Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)
 Transmission format: Multidrop link OPEN
 Communication speed: MAX 38400bps
 Overall length: 500m Terminating resistor switch
 Connection cable:Twisted pair cable Initially set to "OPEN".
(4 pairs) Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.
100Ω
RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2 RXD

(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)
SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2

TXD (TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)
P5S SG P5S SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND) VCC
2.4.10 Communication operation

Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can Programmable controller
perform communication operation from a personal
computer etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a
communication cable, a user program can run and Multidrop link
monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link Inverter Inverter Inverter
operation), communication can be performed with the
PU connector and RS-485 terminal. (32 inverters
maximum are
For the Modbus-RTU protocol, communication can be connectable)
performed with the RS-485 terminal.
For further details, refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).
26
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in
accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
2.5.1 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration.
(1) Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
ON OFF OCR contact
T *2
MC
GRZG type
MC OCR discharging resistor *5
MCCB MC R R
Motor External thermal
R/L1 U relay *4
Three-phase AC
power supply S/L2 V M
T/L3 W
Inverter *3 FR-BU2
PR A
P/+ P/+ B
*1
N/- N/- C
BUE
SD
*3
10m or less
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other. 2
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*3 Keep a wiring distance of within 5m between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor. Even when the wiring

is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m. When twisting, twist at least 5 times per meter.
The brake unit may be damaged if cables are not twisted when the wiring length is 5m or more or the wiring length exceeds
10m or more even if cables are twisted.
*4 It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of discharging resistors.
*5 Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.
<Recommended external thermal relay>
1/L1 5/L3
Brake Unit Discharging Resistor Recommended External Thermal Relay TH-N20
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50 (one) TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A

FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10 (three in series) TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5 (four in series) TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
2/T1 6/T3
FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2 (six in series) TH-N20CXHZ 11A
To the brake To a resistor
FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10 (six in series) TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
unit terminal P/+
FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5 (eight in series) TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2 (twelve in series) TH-N20CXHZ 11A
CAUTION
 Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
27
(2) FR-BR-(H) connection example with resistor unit
ON OFF
T *2
MC
MC FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor P TH1 *4
Three phase AC
power supply S/L2 V M PR
T/L3 W TH2
*3
Inverter FR-BU2
PR A
P/+ P/+ B
*1
N/- N/- C
BUE
*3
SD
10m or less
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
*3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. Even when the
wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
*4 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault.
CAUTION
(3) Connection example with MT-BR5 type resistor unit

After making sure that the wiring is correct, set the following parameters:
 Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
 Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "0 (initial value)"
Set Pr. 0 Brake mode selection = "2" in the brake unit FR-BU2.
T *2
MCCB MC ON OFF CR1

Motor
Three phase AC R/L1 U
power supply S/L2 V M MC
T/L3 W MC
10m *3
*1
or less
P/+ P CR1
N/- N P TH1
*3
PR P
BUE PR
SD TH2 *4
Inverter Brake unit Resistor unit

*5 FR-BU2 MT-BR5
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
*3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (MT-BR5) should be within 5m. If twisted wires
are used, the distance should be within 10m.
*4 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault.
*5 CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.
CAUTION
 The stall prevention (overvoltage), oL, does not occur while Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1" and Pr. 70 Special
regenerative brake duty = "0% (initial setting)."
Parameters referred to 
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
28
2.5.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)

When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU(H)/MT-BU5) to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection
as shown below.
(1) Connection with the FR-BU (55K or lower)
ON OFF
T *2
MC
MC FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor
P TH1
Three-phase AC
power supply S/L2 V M PR
T/L3 W TH2
Inverter FR-BU
PR
HA
P/+ P/+ HB
*1
N/− N/− HC
*3
10m or less
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match
with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
*3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. If
twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m. 2
CAUTION
 If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a

magnetic contactor on the inverter’s input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
29
(2) Connection with the MT-BU5 (75K or higher)

After making sure that the wiring is correct, set the following parameters:
 Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
 Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "10%"
T *1
ON OFF CR1 CR2

MCCB MC
U Motor
Three-phase R/L1
AC power S/L2 V M MC
supply MC
T/L3 W
10m or *2
Inverter less CR1
P TH1
P/+ P
N/ PR PR
TH2
CR2
TH1
CN8 P
P
PR PR
TH2
Brake unit Resistor unit
MT-BU5 MT-BR5
*2 The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m maximum when wires are
twisted and 5m maximum when wires are not twisted.
CAUTION
 Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied
with the brake unit reaches the inverter.
 For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to
the inverter terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the CN8 connector inside by making cuts in the rubber
bush at the top of the inverter for leading the cable.
 The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit
to one pair of terminal (P, PR).
<Inserting the CN8 connector>
Make cuts in rubber bush of the upper portion of the inverter and lead a cable.
1) Make cuts in the rubber bush for leading the CN8 connector cable with a nipper or cutter knife.
Rubber bushes
Make cuts in
rubber bush
2) Insert a connector on the MT-BU5 side through a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side.
CN8 connector Insert the connector until
Wire clamp
you hear a click sound.
CAUTION
Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely.
30
2.5.3 Connection of the brake unit (BU type)

Connect the brake unit (BU type) correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Remove the
jumper across terminals HB and PC and terminals TB and HC of the brake unit and fit it across terminals PC and TB.
ON OFF
T*
MC
Inverter MC
MCCB MC Motor
U
R/L1 V M
Three-phase Brake unit
AC power S/L2 W (BU type) Remove the
supply jumper
T/L3
TB
N/-
N OCR HC
P/+
HB
Discharging HA
resistor OCR
PC
PR Fit a jumper
P
* When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
CAUTION
 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharging resistor should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the
distance should be within 5m.
 If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of fault.
2
31
2.5.4 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2)

When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as
shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and the inverter.
Perform the wiring securely, and set Pr.19 Base frequency voltage (under V/F control) = "rated motor voltage" and Pr.30
Regenerative function selection = "2".
Outside box High power

Reactor1 (FR-HCB2)*10 Reactor2 factor converter
Inverter
MCCB MC (FR-HCL21) (FR-HCL22) (FR-HC2) *1
*7 R/ R2/ *7 R2/ R3/ *7 R3/ R4/ *7 R/L1 Motor
Three-phase L1 L12 L13 L13 L14
R4/L14 U
L12 S/L2
AC power S/ S2/ S2/ S3/ S3/ S4/ V M
L23 S4/L24 T/L3 W
supply L2 L22 L22 L23 L24
R1/L11
T/ T2/ T2/ T3/ T3/ T4/
L3 L32 L32 L33 L33 L34 T4/L34 S1/L21 Earth
*8
Fuse *9 (ground)
*8 P/+ P/+
*2
ROH1 ROH N/- N/-
ROH2 SD *5
88R 88R RDY X10 *3
88S 88S *4 IPF X11 *3
R/L1 RSO RES
*8 S/L2 *6
T/L3 SE SD
R1/L11
S1/L21 *8 *8
*1 Remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as between S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control
circuit to across terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 126.))
*2 Do not install an MCCB for the terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P and P/+ or between N and N/-). Connecting the opposite polarity of
terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
*3 Assign the X10 (X11) signal to a terminal using any of the Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 103)
For RS-485 or any other communication where the start command is only transmitted once, use the X11 signal to save the operation mode at the
time of an instantaneous power failure.
*4 Assign the IPF signal to an FR-HC2 terminal. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
*5 Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-HC2 to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the
FR-HC2 to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-HC2 will be damaged.
*6 Always connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the FR-HC2 to the power supply. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage
the FR-HC2.
*7 Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor 1 terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the FR-HC2 terminals (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34). It will not
operate properly.
*8 Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
*9 Installation of a fuse is recommended. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
*10 Outside box is not available for 280K or higher. Connect filter capacitors, inrush current limit resistors, and magnetic contactors.
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
CAUTION
 The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 must
be matched.
 Match the control logic (sink logic / source logic) of the high power factor converter and the inverter. (Refer to 2.4.6 Changing the
control logic)
 Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-HC2 is connected.
32
2.5.5 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)

When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) (55K or lower), make connection so that the
inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and the terminal symbols of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) are the
same.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection.
R/L1 U Motor
S/L2 *1
T/L3 V M
R1/L11 W
S1/L21
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type
reactor (FR-CVL) *5 Power regeneration Inverter
common converter
MCCB MC1
R/L11 R2/L12
Three-phase R2/L1
AC power S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+
supply T/L31 T2/L32 *2
T2/L3 N/L− N/−
P24 PC
R/L11
SD SD
S/L21 *4
RDYA
T/MC1 *6
RDYB X10 *3
RSO RES
SE
*1 Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and terminals S/L2 and S1/L21 of the inverter,
and connect the control circuit power supply across terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect
anything to the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
(E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 126.))
*2 Do not insert the MCCB between the terminals P/+ andN/- (between P/L+ andP/+, between N/L- andN/-
). Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter. 2
*3 Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
(Refer to page 103.)
*4 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1.

Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
*5 Be sure to connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the
inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting,
FR-CV will be damaged.
CAUTION
 The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
 Use sink logic (initial setting) when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic is selected.
 Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-CV is connected.
33
2.5.6 Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC)

When connecting a power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (75K or higher), perform wiring securely as shown below.
Incorrect connection will damage the regeneration converter and inverter. After connecting securely, set "1" in
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty.
Inverter
MCCB MC1 MC2
R/L1 U Motor
Three-phase
AC power S/L2 V M
supply T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
DCL
P1
P1
P/+ N/
P
MT-RCL
P N
R R2 Reset signal
R2 RES
S S2 STF
S2 SD
T T2 C
T2
B
A Alarm signal
R
S
RDY
T
Ready signal
R1
SE
S1
MT-RC
CAUTION
 When using the FR-F700P series together with the MT- ON
Inverter power supply (MC2)
RC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of
the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after
1s or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT-RC.
When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MT- MT-RC power supply (MC1) ON
RC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the 1s or more
MCCB may trip or be damaged.
 Refer to the MT-RC manual for precautions for
connecting the power coordination reactor and others.
34
2.5.7 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL)

(1) Keep the surrounding air temperature within the permissible range (-10C to +50C). Keep enough clearance
around the reactor because it heats up. (Take 10cm or more clearance on top and bottom and 5cm or more on left
and right regardless of the installation direction.)
10cm or more
5cm or 5cm or 5cm or 5cm or

more more more more
(2) When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it between terminals P1 and P/+.
For the 55K or lower, the jumper connected across terminals P1 and P/+ must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor
will not exhibit its performance.
For the 75K or higher, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
P1 P/+
FR-HEL
For the 55K or lower,

remove the jumper.
(3) The DC reactor (FR-HEL) is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws when the DC reactor
is securely mounted to the enclosure. If the DC reactor is not earthed (grounded) securely enough, an earthing
(grounding) cable may be used. 2
When you are using an earthing (grounding) cable with a 55K or lower capacity inverter, wire the cable to the
installation hole where varnish is removed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HEL.)

For 75K or higher, use an earth (ground) terminal to perform earthing (grounding). (Refer to page 153)
CAUTION
 The wiring distance should be within 5m.
 The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the
earthing (grounding) cable. (Refer to page 14)
 Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-HC2 or FR-CV is connected.
35
Power-OFF and magnetic contactor
(MC)
2.6 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)

(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
(Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g.
emergency stop operation).
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work
If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as
JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush current at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is 1,000,000 times (about
500,000 times for the 200V class 37K or higher)), frequent starts/stops must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter start
controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
• Inverter start/stop circuit example
MCCB MC
R/L1 U As shown on the left, always use the start signal
Power V To the (ON or OFF of STF (STR) signal) to make a start
S/L2
supply motor
T/L3 W or stop.
*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-
R1/L11 down transformer.
*2
S1/L21 *2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21
T *1 of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC to
Inverter hold an alarm signal when the inverter's protective
Operation preparation circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers
C1
OFF ON MC across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, and S/L2 and S1/
B1 L21. (Refer to page 17 for removal of the jumper.)
A1
MC
RA
STF/STR
Start/Stop SD
RA
MC Start
Stop RA
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and general-purpose motor only when both the inverter and motor
are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the
inverter and such will activate. When using a magnetic contactor to switch to a commercial power supply while using a
general-purpose motor, it is recommended to use the electronic bypass function Pr. 135 to Pr. 139. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied)).
CAUTION
IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded in the rotor. Motor terminals hold high-voltage while the
motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before wiring or inspection, the motor must be confirmed to be stopped.
When the motor is driven by the load in applications such as fan and blower, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the
inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
36
Precautions for use of the inverter
2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter

The FR-F700P series is a highly reliable product, but using incorrect peripheral circuits or incorrect operation/handling
methods may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform
such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in
an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the appropriate size to make a voltage drop of 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 14 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The total wiring length should be within the prescribed length.
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease, or the equipment connected to
the output side may malfunction. This is caused by a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore,
note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 16)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference

The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize
interference. (Refer to page 10)
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter 2
output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are
installed, immediately remove it.

(8) For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor.
When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and
then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is no more than 30VDC using a
tester, etc.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase to phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-ON.
Especially for an old motor or use in a hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000
times (For the 200V class 37K or higher, switching life is about 500,000)), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be
avoided.
Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 9)
(11) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may
damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected
incorrectly to short terminals 10E and 5.
(12) When driving a general-purpose motor, provide

MC1
electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 Interlock
which are used for bypass operation. Power R/L1 U
When the wiring is incorrect or if there is an electronic IM
supply S/L2 V MC2
bypass circuit as shown on the right, the inverter will be
damaged when the power supply when it is connected to the T/L3 W Undesirable current
inverter U, V, W terminals due to arcs generated at the time Inverter
of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
37
Precautions for use of the inverter
(13) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor
in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(14) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, connect an MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1)To release the inverter from the power supply when a fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency
stop operation).
2)To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power
failure
3)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-
AC-3 class rated current.
(15) Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When
the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will
activate. When MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it ON/OFF after the
inverter and motor have stopped.
IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded in the rotor. Motor terminals hold high-
voltage while the motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before wiring or inspection, the motor
must be confirmed to be stopped. When the motor is driven by the load in applications such as fan and blower, a low-
voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed
while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
(16) Countermeasures against inverter-generated EMI

If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes frequency setting signal to fluctuate and motor rotation
speed to be unstable when changing motor speed with analog signal, the following countermeasures are effective.
· Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
· Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
· Use shield cables as signal cables.
· Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).
(17) Instructions for overload operation

When performing an operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, increase/decrease in the temperature of the
transistor element of the inverter may repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal
fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing bound current,
starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient
torque and the motor may not start. A counter action for this is to raise the permissible current level by increasing the
inverter capacity (up to 2 ranks) when using a general-purpose motor, and by increasing the inverter and IPM motor
capacities when using an IPM motor.
(18) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
38
Failsafe of the system which uses
the inverter
2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter

When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter
fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products,
provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the
inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter,
without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be
detected.
No. Interlock Method Check Method Used Signals Refer to Page

Refer to Chapter 4
Inverter protective Operation check of an alarm contact Fault output signal
1) of the Instruction
function operation Circuit error detection by negative logic ALM signal
Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4
Operation ready signal
2) Inverter running status Operation ready signal checks of the Instruction
(RY signal)
Manual (Applied)
Start signal Refer to Chapter 4
Logic check of the start signal and
3) Inverter running status (STF signal, STR signal) of the Instruction
running signal
Running signal (RUN signal) Manual (Applied)
Start signal
Refer to Chapter 4
Logic check of the start signal and (STF signal, STR signal)
4) Inverter running status of the Instruction
output current Output current detection signal
Manual (Applied)
Y12 signal
(2) Backup method outside the inverter

Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure 2
status of the inverter itself. For example, when the inverter CPU fails, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter
fault signal, start signal and RUN signal, there is a case where a fault signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output

even if an inverter fault occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the
backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
1) Start signal and actual operation check

Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to
the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the
start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is
recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2) Command speed and actual operation check

Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command
and detected speed of the speed detector.
Controller
System failure
Inverter Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor
39
Setting procedure of IPM motor control
<IPM>
3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR IPM <IPM>
Highly efficient motor control and highly accurate motor speed control can be performed by using the inverter with an IPM motor.
The motor speed is detected by the output voltage and current of the inverter. It does not require a speed detector such as an
encoder. The inverter drives the IPM motor with the least required current when a load is applied in order to achieve the
highest motor efficiency.
POINT
The following conditions must be met to perform IPM motor control.
· For the motor model, a dedicated IPM motor (MM-EFS model, MM-THE4 model, or MM-EF model) must be used.
· The motor capacity must be equivalent to the inverter capacity. (The 0.75K inverter can be used with the 0.4kW MM-EF.)
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) must be performed.
· The overall wiring length with the motor must be within the specified value. (Refer to page 16)
3.1 Setting procedure of IPM motor control IPM <IPM>
· This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the
IPM motor control.
Perform IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode (IPM) on the operation panel.* (Refer to page 41)
Set "1" or "12" in (IPM parameter initialization) to select IPM motor

control. Refer to page 41 for the setting method.
Setting value "1": MM-EF
Setting value "12": MM-EFS, MM-THE4
P.RUN on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is lit when IPM motor control is set.
Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting.

Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-
speed setting as required.
Set the operation command. (Refer to page 77)
Select the start command and speed command.
Test run
* IPM parameter initialization is performed by setting Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization or by selecting (IPM parameter initialization) on the
operation panel. To change to the IPM motor control, perform IPM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is performed after setting
other parameters, some of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to page 42 for the parameters that are initialized.)
REMARKS
· "Er1" appears if IPM parameter initialization is performed while Pr.72 = "25."
· To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr.80 Motor capacity = "0.4" before setting IPM parameter initialization.
· IPM motor control can also be selected with Pr. 80 Motor capacity and Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 42)
CAUTION
· For the setting range of a speed command under dedicated IPM motor (MM-EFS/MM-THE4 1500r/min specification, MM-EF 1800r/min
specification) controls, refer to the output frequency range in Chapter 8.2 Common specifications (Refer to page 151).
· The selectable carrier frequencies under IPM motor control are 2k, 6k, 10k, and 14kHz. (Only 2k and 6kHz are selectable for 75K or higher.)
· Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range lower than 150r/min (MM-EFS, MM-THE4 1500r/min specification)
or 180r/min (MM-EF 1800r/min specification). Generally, speed control can be performed in the range that satisfies the ratio, 1:10.
· During IPM motor control, the RUN signal is output about 100ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR). The delay is due to the
magnetic pole detection.
· The following operations and controls are disabled during IPM motor control: adjustable 5 points V/F, bypass sequence, energy saving
operation, Optimum excitation control, and speed smoothing.
· The option surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used under IPM motor
control, so do not connect them.
· When parameter copy is performed from an FR-F700P series inverter, which is set to use MM-EFS or MM-THE4 under IPM motor control,
check that IPM motor control is selected on the operation panel (P.RUN is lit) after the copy. When parameters are copied to an FR-F700P
series inverter, which is not compatible with MM-EFS or MM-THE4, Simple magnetic flux vector control is selected instead of IPM motor
control.
40
Setting procedure of IPM motor control
<IPM>
(1) IPM motor control setting by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel ( )
POINT
· The parameters required to drive an IPM motor are automatically changed as a batch. (Refer to page 42.)
Initialize the parameter setting for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor (MM-EFS, MM-THE4) by selecting the
Operation example
parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
Operation Display
1. Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
The parameter
2. Parameter setting mode number read
Press to choose the parameter setting previously appears.
mode.
3. Selecting the parameter
Turn until (IPM parameter
initialization) appears.
4. Displaying the setting

Press to read the currently set value.
" " (initial value) appears.
5. Selecting the setting
Turn to change it to the set value " ".
6. Parameter setting
Press to set.
Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!
P.RUN indicator is lit.
Turn to read another parameter.
3
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the automatic parameter setting (AUTO).
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM>

Setting Description
0 Parameter settings for a general-purpose motor
1 Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS and MM-THE4
12
(rotations per minute)
22, 32 For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
REMARKS
· Performing IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel automatically changes
the Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization setting.
· The parameter initialization sets the same capacity as the inverter capacity to Pr. 80 Motor capacity. To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr. 80
Motor capacity = "0.4" before performing IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
· The IPM parameter setting is displayed as "1, 12" in the parameter setting mode even if Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization = "101, 112."
(2) IPM motor control display and IPM motor control signal
P.RUN on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is lit and the IPM motor control signal (IPM) is output during IPM motor control.
For the terminal to output the IPM motor control signal, assign the function by setting "57 (positive logic)" or "157
(negative logic)" to any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
41
Initializing the parameters required to drive
an IPM motor (Pr.998) <IPM>
3.2 Initializing the parameters required to drive an IPM motor

(Pr.998) IPM <IPM>
· By performing IPM parameter initialization, IPM motor control is selected and the parameters, which are
required to drive an IPM motor, are changed. Initial settings and setting ranges of the parameters are adjusted
automatically to drive an IPM motor.
· Initialization is performed by setting Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization or by choosing the mode on the operation
panel.
Parameter Initial Setting

Name Description
Number value range
Initial parameter settings
Parameter settings for a general- required to drive a
0
purpose motor (frequency) general-purpose motor
are set.
Parameter settings for a
1 high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
Parameter settings for a premium
IPM parameter 12 high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
998 * 0
and MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
Initial parameter settings
initialization required to drive an IPM
Parameter settings for a
motor are set.
101 high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
(frequency)
112 high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
and MM-THE4 (frequency)
22, 32,
For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
122, 132
* This parameter allows its setting to be changed in any operation mode even if "0 (initial value)" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
(1) IPM parameter initialization (Pr.998)

· To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr. 80 Motor capacity = "0.4" before performing IPM parameter initialization. By
performing IPM parameter initialization, initial settings required to drive an IPM motor can be set in parameters.
· When Pr. 998 = "1 or 12," the monitor is displayed and the frequency is set using the motor rotations per minute.
To use frequency to display or set, set Pr. 998 = "101 or 112."
· Set Pr. 998 = "0" to change the parameter settings from the settings required to drive an IPM motor to the settings
required to drive a general-purpose motor.
Operation after selecting the
Pr.998 Setting Description parameter setting mode on the
operation panel
0 (initial value) Parameter settings for a general-purpose motor (frequency) (IPM)  Write "0"
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
1 (IPM)  Write "1"
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
12 (IPM)  Write "12"
and MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
101 Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (frequency) Invalid
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
112 Invalid
and MM-THE4 (frequency)
REMARKS
· Make sure to set Pr. 998 before setting other parameters. If the Pr. 998 setting is changed after setting other parameters, some
of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to "(2) IPM parameter initialization list" for the parameters that are initialized.)
· To change back to the parameter settings required to drive a general-purpose motor, perform parameter clear or all parameter
clear.
· If the setting of Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization is changed from "1, 12 (rotations per minute)" to "101, 112 (frequency)," or
from "101, 112" to "1, 12," all the target parameters are initialized.
The purpose of Pr. 998 is not to change the display units. Use Pr. 144 Speed setting switchover to change the display units between
rotations per minute and frequency. Pr. 144 enables switching of display units between rotations per minute and frequency
without initializing the parameter settings.
Example) Changing the Pr. 144 setting between "6" and "106" switches the display units between frequency and rotations per
minute.
42
(2) IPM parameter initialization list

By selecting IPM motor control from the parameter setting mode or with Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization, the
parameter settings in the following table change to the settings required to drive an IPM motor. The changed settings
differ according to the IPM motor specification (capacity). Refer to the IPM motor specification list shown below.
Performing parameter clear or all parameter clear sets back the parameter settings to the settings required to drive a
general-purpose motor.
Setting
General- Setting
IPM motor (rotations
purpose IPM motor (frequency) increments
per minute)
Parameter Name motor
0 1 (MM-EF), 101 (MM-EF),
0, 101,
Pr.998 (Initial 12 (MM-EFS, 112 (MM-EFS, 1, 12
112
setting) MM-THE4) MM-THE4)
Maximum motor rotations
1 Maximum frequency 120/60Hz *3
per minute
Maximum motor frequency 1r/min 0.01Hz
Rated motor rotations per
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60Hz
minute
Rated motor frequency 1r/min 0.01Hz
Rated inverter
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
current
Rated motor current 0.01A/0.1A *3
Minimum rotations per
13 Starting frequency 0.5Hz
minute
Minimum frequency 1r/min 0.01Hz
Minimum rotations per
15 Jog frequency 5Hz
minute
Maximum motor rotations
18 High speed maximum frequency 120/60Hz *3
per minute
Maximum motor frequency 1r/min 0.01Hz
Acceleration/deceleration Rated motor rotations per
20 reference frequency
60Hz
minute
22 Stall prevention operation level 120% Short-time motor torque 0.1%

37 Speed display 0 0 1
55 Frequency monitoring reference 60Hz
minute
Rated inverter
56 Current monitoring reference
current
120 (when Pr.998 = "1 or 101")
71 Applied motor 0
210 (when Pr.998 = "12 or 112")
1
80 Motor capacity 9999 Inverter capacity *2 0.01kW/0.1kW *3

125 Terminal 2 frequency setting Rated motor rotations per
60Hz Rated motor frequency 1r/min 0.01Hz
(903) gain frequency minute
3
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting Rated motor rotations per
60Hz Rated motor frequency 1r/min 0.01Hz
(905) gain frequency minute
Number of motor poles +
144 Speed setting switchover 4 Number of motor poles 1
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM>

100
240 Soft-PWM operation selection 1 0 1
PWM frequency automatic
260 switchover
1 1 1
263 Subtraction starting frequency 60Hz
minute
Power failure deceleration time Rated motor rotations per
266 switchover frequency
60Hz
minute
Maximum motor rotations Maximum motor frequency
374 Overspeed detection level 9999
per minute  105%  105%
1r/min 0.01Hz
390 *1 % setting reference frequency 60Hz Rated motor frequency 0.01Hz

505 Speed setting reference 60Hz Rated motor frequency 0.01Hz
Current average value monitor Rated inverter
557 signal output reference current current
Speed detection hysteresis Speed detection hysteresis
870 Speed detection hysteresis 0Hz
rotations per minute frequency
1r/min 0.01Hz
Regeneration avoidance Minimum rotations per
885 compensation frequency limit value
6Hz
minute
Energy saving monitor Rated inverter
893 reference (motor capacity) capacity
Motor capacity (Pr. 80) 0.01kW/0.1kW *3
*1 This parameter can be set when FR-A7NL is mounted.

*2 When Pr.80 Motor capacity  "9999," the Pr.80 Motor capacity setting is not changed by IPM parameter initialization. IPM parameter initialization is
performed by setting Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization or the parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
*3 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
REMARKS
If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "1" or "12"), the frequency-related parameters not
listed in the table and the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.
43
[IPM motor specification list]

MM-EF MM-EF MM-EF MM-EFS MM-EFS MM-THE4
(30kW or (37kW to (90kW or (15kW or (18.5kW to (75kW to
lower) 75kW) higher) lower) 55kW) 160kW)
Rated motor frequency 90Hz 120Hz 120Hz 75Hz 100Hz 75Hz
(rotations per minute) (1800r/min) (1800r/min) (1800r/min) (1500r/min) (1500r/min) (1500r/min)
Maximum motor frequency 135Hz 180Hz 160Hz 112.5Hz 150Hz 90Hz
Number of motor poles 6 8 8 6 8 6
Short-time motor torque 120% 120% 120% 120% 120% 120%
Minimum frequency 9Hz 12Hz 12Hz 7.5Hz 10Hz 7.5Hz
Speed detection hysteresis
0.5Hz 0.5Hz 0.5Hz 0.5Hz 0.5Hz 0.5Hz
frequency (rotations per
(10r/min) (8r/min) (8r/min) (10r/min) (8r/min) (10r/min)
minute)
44
4 DRIVING THE MOTOR

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.1 Component of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
To mount the operation panel (FR-DU07) on the enclosure surface, refer to page 25.
(a) Unit indicator (g) Monitor indicator
(b) Monitor (4-digit LED) (h) IPM motor control indicator
(c) Setting dial (i) Operation mode indicator
(d) PU/EXT key (j) Rotation direction indicator
(e) MODE key (k) FWD key, REV key
(f) SET key (l) STOP/RESET key
No. Component Name Description

Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. (Flickers when the set frequency monitor is displayed.)
(a) Unit indicator A: Lit to indicate current.
V: Lit to indicate voltage.
Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.

(b) Monitor (4-digit LED)
(To monitor the output power, set frequency and other items, set Pr.52.)
The dial of the Mitsubishi inverters. The setting dial is used to change the frequency and
parameter settings.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:
(c) Setting dial  To display a set frequency in the monitor mode
 To display the present setting during calibration
 To display a fault history number in the faults history mode
Used to switch between the PU and External operation modes.
To use the External operation mode (operation using a separately connected frequency setting
potentiometer and start signal), press this key to light up the EXT indicator.
(d) PU/EXT key (Press simultaneously (0.5s), or change the Pr.79 setting to change to the combined
operation mode. )
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Used to cancel the PU stop also.
Used to switch among different setting modes. 4
(e) MODE key Pressing simultaneously changes the operation mode.
Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation. The key lock is invalid when Pr.161 = "0
DRIVING THE MOTOR
(initial setting)." (Refer to page 103.)

Used to enter a setting.
Output frequency  Output current  Output voltage*
If pressed during the
(f) SET key operation, monitored item
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
changes as the following:
energy saving monitor is set with Pr. 52.
(g) Monitor indicator Lit to indicate the monitor mode.
IPM motor control Lit to indicate IPM motor control.
(h) Flickers to indicate IPM motor test operation.
indicator
PU: Lit to indicate the PU operation mode.
Operation mode EXT: Lit to indicate the External operation mode. (EXT is lit at power-ON in the initial setting.)
(i) NET: Lit to indicate the Network operation mode.
indicator
PU and EXT: Lit to indicate EXT/PU combined operation mode 1 and 2
FWD: Lit to indicate the forward rotation.
REV: Lit to indicate the reverse rotation.
Rotation direction Lit: When the forward/reverse operation is being performed.
(j) Flickers: When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.
indicator
When the frequency command is lower than the starting frequency.
When the MRS signal is being input.
FWD key: Used to give a start command in forward rotation.
(k) FWD key, REV key
REV key: Used to give a start command in reverse rotation.
Used to stop operation commands.
(l) STOP/RESET key
Used to reset a fault when the protective function (fault) is activated.
45
4.1.2 Basic operation (factory setting)

Operation mode switchover
At power-ON (External operation mode)
PU Jog operation mode
(Example)
Monitor/frequency setting
Value change and frequency flicker.

PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor) (Refer to page 50) Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor

Parameter setting
Displays the present

Parameter setting mode setting
(Example)
Value change Parameter and a setting value

flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter clear All parameter Fault clear

clear
Initial value change list Parameter copy
Automatic parameter IPM parameter

setting initialization
[Operation for displaying faults history]

Faults history
The past eight faults can be displayed. (Refer to page 131)

(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists, is displayed.
While a fault is displayed:
The display shifts as follows by pressing : Output frequency at the fault
Output current Output voltage Energization time.
(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)
Pressing the setting dial shows the fault history number.
46
4.1.3 Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)
Setting of Pr. 79 Operation mode selection according to combination of the start command and speed command can be
easily made.
Operation example Start command by the external signal (STF/STR), frequency command by .
Operation Display
2. Press and for 0.5s.
3. Turn until appears.

(Refer to the table below for other settings) Flickering
Operation Method
Operation Panel Indication
Start command Frequency command
, *
Flickering
External Analog
(STF, STR) voltage input
Flickering
External
(STF, STR) *
Flickering
Analog
, voltage input
Flickering
* To use as a potentiometer, refer to page 55.
4. Press to set. 4
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!

DRIVING THE MOTOR
The monitor display appears after 3s.
REMARKS
is displayed ... Why?
Pr. 79 is not registered in user group with "1" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
is displayed ... Why?
Setting cannot be changed during operation. Turn the start command ( or , STF or STR) OFF.
 If is pressed before pressing , the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display. If the
easy setting mode is terminated while Pr.79 = "0 (initial setting)," the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode and the
External operation mode. Check the operation mode.
 Reset can be made with .
 The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal
4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
47
4.1.4 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s))

Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be invalid to prevent parameter change, and
unexpected start or frequency setting.
· Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
· When the setting dial and key operation are invalid, appears on the operation panel.
If dial and key operation is attempted while dial and key operation are invalid, appears. (When dial or key
is not touched for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
· To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press for 2s.
POINT
Set "10 or 11" (key lock valid) in Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation Display
1.Screen at power-ON
2.Press to choose the PU PU indicator is lit.

operation mode.
The parameter
3.Press to choose the parameter
number read
setting mode. previously
appears.
4.Turn until (Pr. 160) appears.
5.Press to read the currently set value.

" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change
it to the setting value of " ".
7.Press to set.
8.Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of " "

in the similar manner.
(Refer to step 4 to 7.) Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
9.Press for 2s to show the key lock.

Press for 2s.
Functions valid even in the operation lock status
Stop and reset with .
CAUTION
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
48
4.1.5 Monitoring of output current and output voltage
POINT
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing during
monitoring mode.
Operation Display
1.Press during operation to choose the output
frequency monitor
2.Independently of whether the inverter is running

in any operation mode or at a stop, the output
current monitor appears by pressing .
3.Press to show the output voltage monitor.
REMARKS
 Monitored item can be changed from output voltage to other items such as output power and set frequency by setting Pr.52.
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
4.1.6 First priority monitor
Hold down for 1s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode.
(To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
4.1.7 Displaying the set frequency
Press the setting dial ( ) in the PU operation mode or in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr. 79 = 4
"3") to show the set frequency.
DRIVING THE MOTOR
49
4.1.8 Changing the parameter setting value

Changing example Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .
Operation Display
2.Press to choose the PU operation PU indicator is lit.

mode.
The parameter
3.Press to choose the parameter number read
setting mode. previously appears.
4. Pr. 1) appears.
5.Press to read the present set value.

6.Turn to change it to the set

value " ".
7.Press to set.

· Turn to read another parameter.
· Press to show the setting again.
· Press twice to show the next parameter.
· Press twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
to appear ... Why?

appears. ......Write disable error
appears. ......Write error during operation
appears. ......Calibration error
appears. ......Mode designation error
For details refer to page 117.
REMARKS
 The number of digits displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed
and set. If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals cannot be
displayed nor set.
(Example) When Pr.1

When 60Hz is set, 60.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed. The second decimal places cannot be displayed nor set.
POINT
When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial setting)," the parameter setting change is only available while the
inverter is stopped under the PU operation mode.
To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under the operation mode other than PU
operation mode, change the Pr.77 setting.
50
Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
4.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range *2 Description
Number
Rated inverter 55K or lower 0 to 500A
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Set the rated motor current.
current *1 *3 75K or higher 0 to 3600A
*1 Refer to page 149 for the rated inverter current value.
*2 The minimum setting increments are 0.01A for the 55K or lower and 0.1A for the 75K or higher.
*3 Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Changing example Change the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting to 2.0A according to the rated motor current.
(FR-F740P-0.75K)
Operation Display
2.Press to choose the PU PU indicator is lit.

operation mode.
3.Press to choose the parameter The parameter number

setting mode. read previously appears.
4.Turn until " "(Pr. 9

Electronic thermal O/L relay) appears.
Refer to page
5.Press to show the present 149 for initial
set value. (2.1A for FR-740P-0.75K) value of the
rated inverter
current.
6.Turn to change
the set value to " ". (2.0A)
7.Press to set.

· By turning , you can read another parameter.
4

DRIVING THE MOTOR
CAUTION
· Internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input.
Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
· When using multiple motors with one inverter, or using a multi-pole motor or a specialized motor, provide an external thermal
relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. And for the setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current (refer
to Chapter 3 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)) to the current value on the motor rating plate. For low-speed operation
where the cooling capability of the motor reduces, it is recommended to use a thermal protector or thermistor-incorporated
motor.
· When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
· PTC thermistor output built-in the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal). For details, refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).
51
When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz
(Pr. 3)<V/F><S MFVC>
4.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3) V/F S MFVC <V/F><S MFVC>
First, check the motor rating plate. If a frequency given on the rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set Pr. 3 Base frequency
to "50Hz". If it remains at "60Hz", the voltage may become too low and torque shortage occurs, resulting in an overload
trip. It may result in an inverter trip (E.OC) due to overload.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
Number
Set the frequency when the rated
3 Base frequency 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
motor torque is generated.
Changing example Change Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz according to the rated motor frequency.
Operation Display
2.Press to choose the PU operation PU indicator is lit.

mode.
The parameter
3.Press to choose the parameter number
setting mode. read previously
appears.
4.Turn until Pr. 3 Base frequency
appears.
5.Press to show the present set

value. (60Hz)
6.Turn to change the set

value to " ". (50Hz)
7.Press to set.

52
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
4.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)

POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
· Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panelRefer to 4.4.1 (Refer to page 53)
· Operation using the setting dial as the potentiometerRefer to 4.4.2 (Refer to page 55)
· Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminalsRefer to 4.4.3 (Refer to page 56)
· Frequency setting using voltage input signalRefer to 4.4.4 (Refer to page 58)
· Frequency setting using current input signalRefer to 4.4.5 (Refer to page 59)
4.4.1 Setting the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)
POINT
Use the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give both of frequency and start commands in PU operation.
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Operation example Performing operation at 30Hz.

Operation Display
2. Operation mode setting PU indicator is lit.
PU EXT NET
Press to choose the PU operation mode.
3. Running frequency setting

Turn to show the frequency " " (30.00Hz) you
Flickers for about 5s
want to set.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
While the value is flickering, press to set the frequency.
(If you do not press , the value flickers for about 5s and the
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!! 4
display then returns to " " (0.00Hz). At this time, return to After 3s, the monitor display appears.
"Step 3" and set the frequency again. After the value flickered for
DRIVING THE MOTOR
about 3s, the display returns to " " (monitor display).
4. Start acceleration  constant speed

Press or to start running. /
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration
time, and " " (30.00Hz) appears.
To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above step 3. (Starting from the previously set frequency.)
5. Deceleration  Stop
Press to stop. Stop
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time, and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00Hz)
displayed.
53
operation mode)
Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency ... Why?

Did you carry out step 4 within 5s after step 3? (Did you press within 5s after turning ?)
The frequency does not change by turning ... Why?
Check to see if the operation mode selected is the External operation mode. (Press to change to
the PU operation mode.)
Operation does not change to the PU operation mode ... Why?
Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
Check that the start command is not on.
Change acceleration time Pr. 7 (Refer to page 74)
Change deceleration time Pr. 8 (Refer to page 74)
For example, limit the motor speed to 60Hz maximum. Set "60Hz" in Pr. 1. (Refer to page 73)
REMARKS
· Press to show the set frequency.
· can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 55)
54
operation mode)
4.4.2 Using the setting dial like a potentiometer at the operation
POINT
Set "0" (extended mode parameter valid) in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation example Change the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
Operation Display
PU indicator is lit.
2. Operation mode setting
Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
3. Press to choose the parameter setting The parameter number
mode. read previously appears.
4. Turn until (Pr. 160) appears.
5. Press to read the present set value.

6. Turn to change it to
the setting value of " ".
7. Press to set.
8. Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of " "

in the similar manner. (Refer to step 4 to 7.)
9. Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose
monitor/frequency monitor. 4
10. Start
Press (or ) to start the inverter.
DRIVING THE MOTOR
11. Turn until " " appears.

The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press .
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
REMARKS
· If flickering "60.00" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting may not be "1".
· Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by simply turning .
CAUTION
· When using the setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency (In the initial setting, it is 120Hz
(55K or lower) or 60Hz (75K or higher) under general-purpose motor control, and it is the maximum motor speed (frequency)
under IPM motor control.)
Adjust Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting according to the application.
55
operation mode)
4.4.3 Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds)

POINT
· Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a start command.

· Switch ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command. (Three-speed setting)
· Set "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
[Connection diagram] Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(High speed)
Inverter Speed 2
(Middle speed)
High speed RH Operation panel Speed 3
Middle speed RM (FR-DU07) (Low speed)
Low speed RL
SD Time
RH ON
RM ON
RL ON
Operation example Operate in low-speed (10Hz)
Operation Display
1. Screen at power-ON.

Set "4" in Pr.79.
[PU] indicator and [EXT] indicator are lit.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47)
3. Start Low
Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL). speed
ON
High
speed
Middle
speed
4. Acceleration  constant speed
Press or to start.
/
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration
5. Deceleration
Press to stop. Stop

displayed.
6. Stop Low
speed
Turn OFF the low-speed switch (RL).
High OFF
speed
Middle
speed
56
operation mode)
60Hz for the RH, 30Hz for the RM and 10Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned ON ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again.
(Refer to page 73.)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr.
182 RH terminal function selection = "2", and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] lamp is not lit ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check the wiring once again.
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".)
(Refer to page 77.)
Change the frequency of the terminal RL, RM, and RH. ... How?
Refer to page 64 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high
speed), Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed), and Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
REMARKS
· Initial value of terminal RH, RM, and RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (To change, set Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6.)
· In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency
of the lower signal. For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
· Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed. (Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
57
operation mode)
4.4.4 Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input)

POINT

· Use the potentiometer (by connecting terminal 2 and 5) to give a frequency command.
[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to the frequency setting potentiometer.(Terminal 10))
Inverter
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5

Operation Display

Set "4" in Pr.79.
3. Start
Press or . /
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency Flickering
command is given.

Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) clock-
wise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the display increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until " "(60Hz) is displayed.
5. Deceleration Stop
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) counter-
clockwise slowly to full. The frequency on the display decreases
Flickering
in the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating with
" " (0.00Hz) displayed.
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator flickers.
6. Stop
Press
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 67.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
58
operation mode)
4.4.5 Setting the frequency by analog input (current input)

POINT

· Use the current signal source (4 to 20mA) (by connecting terminal 4 and 5) to give a frequency command.
· Switch ON the AU signal.
Inverter
Operation panel
AU signal AU (FR-DU07)
SD
Current signal 4 (+)
source
(4 to 20mADC) 5 (-)

Operation Display

Set "4" in Pr.79.
3. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is ON.
/
Press or
Flickering
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency command is given.

Current signal
Perform 20mA input. source
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration (20mADC)
5. Deceleration Current signal Stop 4

Input 4mA or less. source
(4mADC)
DRIVING THE MOTOR
Flickering
displayed. [FWD] indicator or [EXT] indicator flickers.
6. Stop
Press
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
Change the frequency (60Hz) at the maximum current input (at 20mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 69.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) at the minimum current input (at 4mA, initial value)
59
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
4.5 Start/stop using terminals (External operation)

POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
· Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel Refer to 4.5.1(Refer to page 60)
· Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting) Refer to 4.5.3 (Refer to page 64)
· Perform frequency setting using voltage input signal  Refer to 4.5.4 (Refer to page 66)
· Perform frequency setting using current input signal  Refer to 4.5.6 (Refer to page 68)
4.5.1 Setting the frequency by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3)
POINT
· Switch ON the STF (STR) signal to give a start command.
· Use ( ) on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a frequency command.
Inverter
Forward rotation STF

start STR
Reverse rotation
start SD
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)

Operation Display

Set "3" in Pr.79.
3. Running frequency setting

Turn to show the selected frequency, " " Flickers for about 5s
(30.00Hz). The frequency flickers for about 5s.
4. While the value is flickering, press to set the
frequency. Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!

After 3s, the monitor display
(If you do not press , the value flickers for about 5s
appears.
and the display then returns to " " (display) Hz. At this
time, return to "Step 8" and set the frequency again.)
After about 3s of flickering of the value, the display goes
back to " " (monitor display).
60
operation)
Operation Display
5. Start acceleration constant speed
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr.7
Acceleration time setting, and " " (30.00Hz) appears.
Forward
[FWD] indicator is lit during forward rotation, and [REV] rotation Reverse
rotation
indicator is lit during reverse rotation. ON
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the
motor cannot start. If both are turned ON while the motor
is running, the motor decelerates to a stop.
6. To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above steps 3 and 4.
(Starting from the previously set frequency.)
7. Deceleration  Stop Forward

Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). rotation Reverse Stop
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 rotation
Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating with " "
(0.00Hz) displayed. OFF
REMARKS
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(All are initial values)
· When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection is set to "3", multi-speed operation (refer to page 64) is also valid.
When the inverter is stopped by of the operation panel (FR-DU07), and are
Flickering
displayed alternately.
1. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF.
2. The display can be reset by .
When the setting dial is used as a potentiometer.
1. Set Pr.160 User group read selection = "0"(Extended mode parameters valid).
2. Set Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection = "1" (setting dial potentiometer). (Refer to
page 55.)
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
61
operation)
4.5.2 Switching between the automatic operation and the manual operation
(operation by the multi-speed setting and the operation panel) (Pr.79=3)
POINT
· Use terminal STF (STR) to give a start command.
· Use terminal RH, RM, and RL to set a frequency (automatic operation) in the normal operation.
· Use the operation panel (FR-DU07) ( ) to set a frequency manually (manual operation) during maintenance,
etc.
· Set "3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1) in Pr.79.
· The priority for the frequency setting is "multi-speed setting > operation panel."
Inverter Speed 1

(High speed)
Forward rotation
start STF Operation panel Speed 2 The frequency set
Reverse rotation (Middle speed) by the operation panel
start STR (FR-DU07) Speed 3
High speed RH (Low speed)
Middle speed RM
Low speed RL Time
RH ON OFF
Automatic operation SD ON OFF
RM
RL ON OFF
Manual operation
Operate at the high-speed (60Hz) (automatic operation) in the normal operation. Operate at 30Hz (manual
Operation example
operation) using the operation panel for an adjustment.
Operation Display

Set "3" in Pr.79.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47.)
3. Frequency setting for the automatic High speed

Middle speed
operation ON Low speed
Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH).
4. Start acceleration constant speed Forward

rotation Reverse
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). rotation
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 ON
Acceleration time setting, and " " (60.00Hz)
appears.
[FWD] indicator is lit during the forward rotation and [REV]
indicator is lit during the reverse rotation.
 If RM has been turned ON, 30Hz is displayed. If RL has
been turned ON, 10Hz is displayed.
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the motor
cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the motor is running, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
5. Deceleration stop Forward

rotation Reverse
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). rotation
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8
Deceleration time setting, and the motor stops rotating with Stop
OFF
[FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
62
operation)
Operation Display
6. Cancelling the automatic operation High speed
Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH). Middle speed
Low speed
OFF
7. Frequency setting in the manual

operation
Flickers for about 5s
Turn to show the selected frequency, " "
(30.00Hz).The frequency flickers for about 5s.
While the value is flickering, press to set the
frequency.
(If you do not press , the value flickers for about 5s Flicker···Frequency setting complete!!
and the display then returns to " " (0.00Hz in the After 3s, the monitor display
monitor display). In that case, turn again and set the appears.
frequency.)
The value flickers for about 3s and the display then returns
to " " (monitor display).
8. Start acceleration constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7
Forward
Acceleration time setting, and " " (30.00Hz) rotation Reverse
appears. rotation
ON
[FWD] indicator is lit during the forward rotation and [REV]
indicator is lit during the reverse rotation.
To change the set frequency, perform the operation in
above "Step 7"(starting from the previously set frequency).
9. Deceleration stop Forward

rotation Reverse
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
rotation Stop
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8
Deceleration time setting, and the motor stops rotating with
OFF
REMARKS 4
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61"). (All are
initial values.)
DRIVING THE MOTOR
· External analog current input (4 to 20mA) can be used to set a frequency instead of the three-speed setting. Turn ON the
terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) to use the analog current input.
When the inverter is stopped by of the operation panel (FR-DU07), are

Flickering
displayed alternately.
1.Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
2.The display can be reset by .
63
operation)
4.5.3 Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds) (Pr.4 to Pr.6)
POINT
· Switch ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command.
· [EXT] must be lit. (When [PU] is lit, switch it to [EXT] with .)
· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, and RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to
change.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning two (or three) terminals simultaneously. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Speed 1

Inverter
(High speed)
Forward rotation start STF Speed 2
Reverse rotation start (Middle speed)
STR Speed 3
High speed RH (Low speed)
Middle speed RM
Low speed RL Time
SD
RH ON
RM ON
RL ON
Changing example Operation at high speed (60Hz).
Operation Display
1. Screen at power-ON ON
2. Start High speed

Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH). Middle speed
ON Low speed
3. Acceleration constant speed Forward

Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). The frequency on the rotation Reverse
rotation
display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration time, and " " ON
(60.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indicator is lit during forward rotation, and [REV]
indicator is lit during reverse rotation.
When RM is turned ON, 30Hz is displayed. When RL is turned
ON, 10Hz is displayed.
CAUTION
motor cannot start.
4. Deceleration Forward
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). rotation Reverse
rotation
time, and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00Hz) Stop
displayed. OFF
5. Stop High speed

Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH). Middle speed
Low speed
OFF
64
operation)
[EXT] is not lit even when is pressed ... Why?
Switchover of the operation mode with is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
60Hz, 30Hz and 10Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned ON. ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to
page 73)
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to page 77)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1",
Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial
values)
[FWD (or REV)] is not lit. ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 STR terminal
function selection)?
(all are initial values)
How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed ?
In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is
given to the set frequency of the lower signal. For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, the
RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority. By setting Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting), up to 7- speed
can be set by combinations of RH, RM, and RL signals. Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).
Perform multi-speed operation more than 8 speed. ... How?
Use the REX signal to perform the operation. Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed.
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
REMARKS
· External operation is fixed by setting "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection when you do not want to take
time pressing or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command. (Refer to page 77)
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
65
operation)
4.5.4 Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input)

POINT
· Use the potentiometer (by connecting terminal 2 and 5 (voltage input)) to give a frequency command.
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to frequency setting potentiometer. (Terminal 10))
Inverter
Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
SD
Frequency setting 10
2
potentiometer
5
Operation Display
2. Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency command is given. Forward
rotation Reverse
CAUTION rotation
ON
Flickering
motor cannot start.
3. Acceleration constant speed

Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer)
clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr.7 Acceleration
time, and " " (60.00Hz) appears. [FWD] indicator is lit
during forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is lit during reverse
rotation.
4. Deceleration
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer)
counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration Flickering
time, and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00Hz) Stop
displayed. [FWD] indicator or [EXT] indicator flickers.
5. Stop Forward
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF. rotation Reverse
rotation
OFF
REMARKS
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(All are initial values.)
66
operation)
The motor will not rotate ... Why?

Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
Use to lit [EXT].
Check that wiring is correct. Check once again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V)
When you want to compensate frequency setting, use terminal 1.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
4.5.5 Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage
input (5V, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency>
Changing example When you use the 0 to 5VDC input to change frequency at 5V from 60Hz (initial value) to
50Hz, set "50Hz" in Pr. 125.
Operation Display
2.Press to show the present set value.

" "(60.00Hz)
3.Turn to change the set value

to " ". (50.00Hz)
4.Press to set.
Flicker ··· 50Hz output at 5V input complete!!
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the monitor/frequency monitor.
6.To check the setting, turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON
and input 5V (turn the potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.)
(Refer to 4.5.4 steps 2 to 5)
The monitor on the operation panel or the frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD does
not indicate exactly 50Hz.... Why?
The indicated value can be adjusted by the calibration parameter C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 4
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD can be adjusted by the
calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
DRIVING THE MOTOR

Set frequency at 0V using calibration Initial value
parameter C2.
Output frequency
60Hz
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
(Hz)
Manual (Applied).)
How can I operate at a frequency higher than
120Hz.
Gain Pr.125
Additionally set Pr.18 High speed maximum Bias
frequency. C2
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction (Pr. 902) 0 100%
Manual (Applied).) 0 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 10V
0 20mA
C3 (Pr. 902) C4 (Pr. 903)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied across
terminals 2 or 5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
67
operation)
4.5.6 Setting the frequency by analog input (current input)
POINT
· Switch ON the AU signal.
· Set "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
Inverter
Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
AU
SD
Current signal 4(+)
source
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)

Operation Display
2. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is ON.
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
CAUTION ON
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the motor Flickering
cannot start.
3. Acceleration constant speed

Perform 20mA input.
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr.7 Acceleration Current signal
source
time, and " " (60.00Hz) appears. (20mADC)
[FWD] indicator is lit during forward rotation, and [REV] indicator
is lit during reverse rotation.
4. Deceleration
Input 4mA or less. Current signal
source
(4mADC)
Flickering
time setting, and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00Hz)
displayed. Stop
[FWD] indicator or [EXT] indicator flickers.
5. Stop Forward
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF. rotation Reverse
rotation
OFF
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
68
operation)
The motor will not rotate ... Why?

Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
PU
Use EXT to lit [EXT].
Check that the AU signal is ON.
Turn the AU signal ON.
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.
4.5.7 Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input
(at 20mA, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency>
Changing example When you use the 4 to 20mA input and want to change the frequency at 20mA from 60Hz (initial
value) to 50Hz, set "50Hz" in Pr. 126.
Operation Display
2.Press to show the present set value.

" "(60.00Hz)
3.Turn to change the set value to " ".

(50.00Hz)
4.Press to set the value.

Flicker ··· 50Hz output at 20mA input complete!!
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
6.To check the setting, turn the start switch (STF or STR)
on and input 20mA. (Refer to 4.5.6 steps 2 to 5)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD does not indicate exactly 50Hz ... Why?
The indicated value can be adjusted by the calibration parameter C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
4
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD can be adjusted by the
DRIVING THE MOTOR
calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.

Set frequency at 4mA using calibration Initial value
parameter C5.
Output frequency
60Hz
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
(Hz)
Manual (Applied).)
How can I operate at a frequency higher than
120Hz. Gain Pr. 126
Additionally set Pr.18 High speed maximum Bias
frequency. C5
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction (Pr. 904)
0 20 100%
Manual (Applied).) 0 4 Frequency setting signal 20mA
0 1 5V
0 2 10V
C6 (Pr. 904) C7 (Pr. 905)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied across
terminals 4 and 5 or adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)
69
Simple mode parameter list
5 ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Simple mode parameter list

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set
the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can
be made from the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).
POINT
Only simple mode parameters are displayed by the initial setting of Pr. 160 User group read selection. Set Pr. 160 User
group read selection as required. (Refer to page 50 for parameter change.)
Pr. 160 Description

9999
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
(Initial Value)
0 Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
Parameter Incre Initial Refer

Name Range Applications
Number ments Value to
0 6/4/3/2/ Set to increase a starting torque or when the
Torque boost 0.1% 1.5/1% 0 to 30% motor with a load will not rotate, resulting in an 72
V/F
*1 alarm [OL] and a trip [OC1]
Maximum 120/ Set when the maximum output frequency need
1 0.01Hz 60Hz *2, 0 to 120Hz
frequency to be limited.
*3 73
Minimum Set when the minimum output frequency need
2 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 120Hz
frequency to be limited.
3
Set when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.
V/F Base frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 52
Check the motor rating plate.
S MFVC
Multi-speed setting
4 0.01Hz 60Hz *3 0 to 400Hz
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting Set when changing the preset speed in the
5 0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz 64
(middle speed) parameter with a terminal.
Multi-speed setting
6 0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 400Hz
(low speed)
7 Acceleration time 0.1s 5/15s *4 0 to 3600s
Acceleration/deceleration time can be set. 74
8 Deceleration time 0.1s 10/30s *4 0 to 3600s
Rated
Electronic thermal 0.01/ inverter 0 to 500/ Protect the motor from overheat by the inverter.
9 51
O/L relay 0.1A *5 current 0 to 3600A *5 Set the rated motor current.
*3
60 Energy saving The inverter output voltage is minimized when

1 0 0, 4, 9 75
V/F control selection using for fan and pump applications.
Operation mode Select the start command location and
79 1 0 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 77
selection frequency setting location.
Terminal 2
Frequency for the maximum value of the
125 frequency setting 0.01Hz 60Hz *3 0 to 400Hz 67
potentiometer (at 5V) can be changed.
gain frequency
Terminal 4
126 frequency setting 0.01Hz 60Hz *3 0 to 400Hz Frequency at 20mA input can be changed. 69
gain frequency
User group read
160 1 9999 0, 1, 9999 Make extended parameters valid —
selection
70
Parameter Incre Initial Refer

Name Range Applications
Number ments Value to

By performing IPM parameter initialization, IPM
0, 1, 12, 101, motor control is selected and the parameters,
42
IPM parameter 112 which are required to drive an IPM motor, are
998 1 0 changed.
initialization
22, 32, 122,
132
Parameter settings are changed as a batch.
Those include communication parameter
Automatic 10, 11, 20, 21, settings for a Mitsubishi human machine
999 1 9999 114
parameter setting 30, 31, 9999 interface (GOT) connection, rated frequency
settings of 50Hz/60Hz, and acceleration/
deceleration time increment settings.
*1 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K, 7.5K/11K to 37K/45K, 55K/75K or higher)
*2 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
*4 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (7.5K or lower/11K or higher)
*5 Setting increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
5
ADJUSTMENT
71
Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0)
<V/F>
5.2 Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0) V/F <V/F>
Set this parameter when "the motor with a load will not rotate", "an alarm [OL] is output, resulting in an inverter
trip due to [OC1], etc.
Parameter Setting
Name Initial Value Description
Number Range
0.75K 6%
1.5K to 3.7K 4% Motor torque in the low-
5.5K, 7.5K 3% frequency range can be
0 Torque boost 0 to 30%
11K to 37K 2% adjusted to the load to increase
45K, 55K 1.5% the starting motor torque.
75K or higher 1%
Changing example When the motor with a load will not rotate,
100%
increase the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% unit by
looking at the motor movement. (The guideline
is for about 10% change at the greatest.) Output
voltage
Pr.0 Setting
Pr.46
range
0 Output Base
frequency frequency
(Hz)
Operation Display
2.Operation mode setting PU indicator is lit.

The parameter
4. Pr. 0) appears.
5.Press to read the present set value. The initial value

" "(initial value is 6% for the 0.75K) differs according
appears. to the capacity.
6.Turn to change it to the set value

" ".
7.Press to set.

REMARKS
· Setting Pr.0 too high may cause the motor to overheat, resulting in an overcurrent trip (OL (overcurrent alarm) then E.OC1
(Overcurrent trip during acceleration)), thermal trip (E.THM (Motor overload trip), and E.THT (Inverter overload trip)).
When a fault (E.OC1) occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% to reset. (Refer to page 121.)
POINT
If the inverter still does not operate properly after taking the above measures, set Pr. 80 Motor capacity and select the
Simple magnetic flux vector control [extended mode]. (Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
72
Limiting the maximum and minimum
output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
5.3 Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
Parameter Setting
Number Range
55K or lower 120Hz* Set the upper limit of the output
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz
75K or higher 60Hz* frequency.
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Changing Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer, etc. to

example 60Hz maximum. Output frequency
(Set "60"Hz in Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.) (Hz)
Clamped at the
Pr.1 maximum frequency
Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
Clamped at the 0 5, 10V

minimum frequency (4mA) (20mA)
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
4. Pr. 1) appears.


value " ".
7.Press to set.

· Press twice to show the next parameter. 5
REMARKS
ADJUSTMENT
· The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will
not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
Note that Pr. 15 Jog frequency has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
· When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting cannot be set by .
· When performing a high speed operation at 120Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency is necessary. Even if
a value higher than the maximum frequency (refer to page 44) is set in Pr.18 under IPM motor control, the high speed maximum
frequency is limited to the maximum motor frequency. (Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency
according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal ON, without entry of the command
frequency.
73
Changing acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
5.4 Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)

Set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase.
Set in Pr. 8 Deceleration time a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
7.5K or lower 5s 0 to 3600/
7 Acceleration time Set the motor acceleration time.
11K or higher 15s 360s *
7.5K or lower 10s 0 to 3600/
8 Deceleration time Set the motor deceleration time.
11K or higher 30s 360s *
* Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments is
"0.1s".
Changing example Change the Pr. 7 Acceleration time setting from "5s"
Pr.20
to "10s". (60Hz) Running
frequency
frequency (Hz)
Output
Time
Acceleration Pr.7 Deceleration Pr.8

time time
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
number read
4. Pr. 7) appears.
5.Press to read the present set value. The initial value

" "(initial value) appears. differs according
to the capacity.

value " ".
7.Press to set.

POINT
If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the rated motor frequency (on page 43)) under IPM
motor control, set the Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range
settings higher than the Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings so that the mild acceleration/deceleration is performed only in the low-
speed range. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Applied) for Pr.791 and Pr.792)
74
Energy saving operation for fans and
pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60) <V/F>
5.5 Energy saving operation for fans and pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60)
V/F <V/F>
Set the following functions to perform energy saving operation for fans and pumps.
5.5.1 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) V/F
Select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) that is suitable for the application and load
characteristics.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
0 For constant torque load
14 Load pattern selection 1
1 For variable-torque load
The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 User group read selection = "0." (Refer to page 70)
Pr.14 = 1
 Set Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1 (for variable-torque load) (initial value)."
 When the output frequency is equal to or less than the base frequency, the output
100%
voltage changes by its square in proportion to the output frequency.
Output voltage
Use this setting to drive a load whose load torque changes in proportion to the square
of the speed, such as a fan and a pump.
Pr.3 Base frequency

CAUTION
 Load pattern selection is available only under V/F control. Load pattern selection is not available under Simple magnetic flux vector
control and IPM motor control.
5.5.2 Energy saving control (Pr.60) V/F
Without a detailed parameter setting, the inverter can automatically perform energy saving operation.
This operation is appropriate for fan and pump applications.
Use Optimum excitation control when connecting one motor to one inverter. Use Energy saving operation when
connecting several motors to one inverter.
Parameter Initial Setting

Name Remarks
Number Value Range
0 Normal operation
60 Energy saving control selection 0 4 Energy saving operation
9 Optimum excitation control
(1) Energy saving operation (setting "4")

· When "4" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter performs the energy saving operation.
· In the energy saving operation, the inverter automatically controls the output voltage to minimize the inverter output
5
voltage during a constant operation.
REMARKS
ADJUSTMENT
· For applications where a large load torque is applied to or machines repeat frequent acceleration/deceleration, an energy saving
effect is not expected.
(2) Optimum excitation control (setting "9")

· When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter performs the Optimum excitation control.
· The Optimum excitation control is a control method which controls excitation current to improve the motor efficiency
to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.
REMARKS
· When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to one inverter,
the energy saving effect is not expected.
75
Energy saving operation for fans and
pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60) <V/F>
CAUTION
· When the energy saving operation and Optimum excitation control are selected, deceleration time may be longer than the
setting value. Since overvoltage alarm tends to occur as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set a longer
deceleration time.
· The energy saving operation and Optimum excitation control are available only under V/F control.
Energy saving operation and Optimum excitation control are not available under Simple magnetic flux vector control and IPM
motor control. (For Simple magnetic flux vector control, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
POINT
To check the energy saving effect, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied) and check the energy
saving effect monitor.
Changing example Set "9" (Optimum excitation control) in Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection.
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
4.Turn until (Pr. 60)

appears.


value " ".
7.Press to set.

8. Perform normal operation.
When you want to check the energy saving effect,
refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
to check the energy saving effect monitor.
76
Selection of the start command and
frequency command sources (Pr. 79)
5.6 Selection of the start command and frequency command

sources (Pr. 79)
Select the start command source and frequency command source.
POINT
Setting value "1" to "4" can be changed in the easy setting mode. (Refer to page 47)
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range

79 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7
LED Indication
Pr.79
Description : OFF Refer to
Setting
: ON
PU operation mode
Chapter 4 of
External/PU switchover mode (press to switch between the PU and External operation mode the Instruction
0
External operation mode.) Manual
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode. NET operation mode
(Applied)
Operation mode Frequency command Start command

PU operation mode
Chapter 4 of
Setting by the operation Input by and the Instruction
1 PU operation mode
panel (FR-DU07) and PU Manual
(fixed) on PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/ (Applied)
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
FR-PU07)
External operation
mode (fixed) External operation mode
External signal input Chapter 4 of
The operation can be
(from terminal 2, 4, and External signal input (from the Instruction
2 performed by
1, JOG, multi-speed terminal STF and STR) NET operation mode Manual
switching between
selection, etc.) (Applied)
the External and NET
operation modes.
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) setting or
Chapter 4 of
External/PU external signal input
External signal input (from the Instruction
3 combined operation (multi-speed setting,
terminal STF and STR) Manual
mode 1 across terminals 4 and 5 External/PU combined
(Applied)
(valid when AU signal operation mode
turns ON)). *1
External signal input Chapter 4 of
External/PU Input by and on
(Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG, the Instruction
4 combined operation
multi-speed selection, PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR- Manual
mode 2
etc.) PU07) (Applied)
Chapter 4 of
6
Switchover mode
Switch among PU operation, External operating, and NET operation while PU operation mode the Instruction 5
Manual
keeping the same operating status.
(Applied)
External operation mode
ADJUSTMENT
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)

X12 signal ON *2 Chapter 4 of
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode. NET operation mode the Instruction
7
(output stop during external operation) Manual
X12 signal OFF *2 (Applied)
Operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode.
*1 The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog
input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
*2 For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign
functions. For Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).
When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
REMARKS
If switching of the operation mode is invalid even though Pr.79 is set, refer to page 137.
77
Parameter clear, all parameter clear
5.7 Parameter clear, all parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear, ALLC All parameter clear to initialize parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
· Refer to the parameter list on page 86 for the parameters to be cleared with this operation.
Operation Display

mode.
The parameter
4.Turn until " ", " "

appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
5.Press to read the currently set value.
6.Turn to change it to
the setting value " ". Parameter clear All parameter clear
7.Press to set.

· Turn to read another parameter.
and are displayed alternately ... Why?

The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press .
is lit and the monitor (4-digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
REMARKS
· Stop the inverter first. Writing error occurs if parameter clear is attempted while the inverter is running.
78
Parameter copy and parameter verification
5.8 Parameter copy and parameter verification

PCPY Setting Description
0 Cancel
1 Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 80.)
REMARKS
· When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-F700(P) series or parameter copy write is performed after parameter copy read is
stopped, "model error ( )" is displayed.
· Refer to the parameter list on page 86 and later for availability of parameter copy.
· When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or check
the values by parameter verification.
· Initial settings of certain parameters are different for different capacities, so some parameter settings may be automatically changed
when parameter copy is performed from a different-capacity inverter. After performing a parameter copy from a different-capacity
inverter, check the parameter settings. Especially under IPM motor control, check the Pr.80 Motor capacity setting before starting the
operation. (Refer to the parameter list (page 86) for the parameters with different initial settings for different capacities.)
· If parameters are copied from an older inverter to a newer inverter that has additional parameters, out-of-range setting values may be
written in some parameters. In that case, those parameters operate as they were set to initial values.
5.8.1 Parameter copy
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters.
Operation Display
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
The parameter
number read
3.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
4.Press to to read the present set value.

5.Turn to change it to
the setting value " ".
6.Press to copy the source parameters The frequency flickers

for about 30s
to the operation panel.
About 30s later
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!

7.Connect the operation panel to the
5
copy destination inverter.
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,

ADJUSTMENT
turn to change it to " ".
9.Press to write the parameters copied to

The frequency flickers
the operation panel to the destination inverter. for about 30s
· Connect it during a stop.
10.When copy is completed,
" " and " " flicker.
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power OFF once, before starting operation.
79
Parameter copy and parameter verification
appears...Why? Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.

appears...Why? Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and flicker alternately
Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or lower and 75K or higher.
1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
55K or lower 75K or higher
Pr. 989 Setting 10 100
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 90, Pr. 158, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196, Pr. 557,
Pr. 893.
5.8.2 Parameter verification
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
Operation Display
1.Move the operation panel to the
inverter to be verified.

mode.
The parameter
5.Turn until (parameter copy)

appears.
6.Press to read the present set

value.
7.Turn to change it to the set value

" "(parameter copy verification mode).
8.Press to read the parameter setting The frequency flickers

of the verified inverter to the operation panel. for about 30s
If different parameters exist, different

parameter numbers and flicker.
Hold down to verify. Flickering
9.If there is no difference, and

flicker to complete verification.
Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
flickers ... Why?

Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
80
Initial value change list
5.9 Initial value change list

Displays and sets the parameters changed from the initial value.
Operation Display

PU EXT NET
PRM indicator is lit.
3. Press to choose the parameter setting
mode.
(The parameter number read previously appears.)
4. Turn until appears.
5. Pressing SET changes to the initial value

SET
change list screen.
6. Turning displays the parameter number
changed.
 Press SET to read the present set value. SET
Turn and press SET to change the SET
setting.
(Refer to step 6 and 7 on page 50.)
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
 Turn to read another parameter.
 The display returns to after all

parameters are displayed.
7. Pressing SET in status returns to

SET
the parameter setting mode.
 Turning sets other parameters.
 Pressing SET displays the change list again.

5
REMARKS
 Calibration parameters (C0 (Pr. 900) to C7 (Pr. 905), C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr. 935)) are not displayed even they are changed from
ADJUSTMENT
the initial settings.

 Only simple mode parameter is displayed when simple mode is set (Pr. 160 = 9999 (initial value)).
 Only user group is displayed when user group is set (Pr. 160 = "1").
 Pr. 160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
81
Parameter list
5.10 Parameter list
5.10.1 List of parameters classified by the purpose

Set the parameters according to the operating conditions.
The following list indicates purpose of use and corresponding parameters.
Purpose of Use Function (Parameter Number) Page
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Acceleration/deceleration patterns and backlash measures (Pr.29, Pr.140 to
Pr.143) 90
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Acceleration/deceleration time setting (Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44, Pr.45,
Pr.147, Pr.791, Pr.792) 87
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Regenerative avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.882 to Pr.886) 111
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Starting frequency (Pr.13, Pr.571) 88
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Manual torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46) 86
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr.90) 97
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Simple magnetic flux vector control and IPM motor control (Pr.80) 97
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Slip compensation (Pr.245 to Pr.247) 105
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Stall prevention (Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48, Pr.49, Pr.66, Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.154,
Pr.156, Pr.157) 89
Communication operation and command source — Selection of the NET operation mode command source (Pr.550) 107
Communication operation and command source — Selection of the PU operation mode command source (Pr.551) 107
Communication operation and setting — Control of parameter write by communication (Pr.342) 107
Communication operation and setting — Control of parameter write by communication (Pr.342) 98
Communication operation and setting — Initial setting of RS-485 communication

(Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.551) 98
Communication operation and setting — Initial setting of RS-485 communication (Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343,
Pr.502, Pr.539, Pr.549 to Pr.551, Pr.779) 107
Detection of output frequency and current — Detection of output current (Y12 signal) and zero current (Y13 signal) (Pr.150
to Pr.153, Pr.166, Pr.167) 102
Detection of output frequency and current — Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, and FU2 signals) (Pr.41 to Pr.43,
Pr.50, Pr.870) 91
Energy saving operation — Energy saving control selection (Pr.60) 94
Frequency setting by analog input — Analog input selection, override function, analog input compensation (Pr.73,
Pr.242, Pr.243, Pr.252, Pr.253, Pr.267) 95
Frequency setting by analog input — Bias and gain for the frequency setting voltage (current) (Pr.125, Pr.126,
Pr.241, C2(Pr.902) to C7(Pr.905)) 99
Frequency setting by analog input — Noise elimination at the analog input (Pr.74) 96
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Compensation of multi speed and remote setting inputs (Pr.28) 89
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Jog operation (Pr.15, Pr.16) 88
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Multi-speed setting operation

(Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239) 86
82
Parameter list
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Remote setting function (Pr.59) 94
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Condition selection for the
second functions activation (RT signal) (Pr.155) 102
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Function assignment of input terminals (Pr.178 to Pr.189) 103
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Function assignment of output terminals (Pr.190 to Pr.196) 104
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Logic selection of the output stop signal (MRS) (Pr.17) 88
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Pulse train output of output power (Y79 signal) (Pr.799) 110
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Remote output function (REM signal) (Pr.495 to Pr.497) 109
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Start signal selection (Pr.250) 105
IPM motor control — Control method selection (Pr.800) 110
IPM motor control — IPM parameter initialization (Pr.998) 114
IPM motor control — Proportional gain setting for speed loops (Pr.820, Pr.821) 110
Limiting the output frequency — Avoiding the mechanic resonance points

(frequency jump) (Pr.31 to Pr.36, Pr.552) 91
Limiting the output frequency — Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18) 86
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Displaying necessary

parameters only (user group) (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174) 102
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Password function (Pr.296, Pr.297) 107
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Prevention of parameter rewrite (Pr.77) 96
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Reset selection and disconnected PU detection (Pr.75) 96
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Reverse motor rotation prevention (Pr.78) 96
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Adjustment of terminal FM and AM

(calibration) (C0(Pr.900), C1(Pr.901)) 113
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Changing DU/PU monitored items and clearing cumulative monitors (Pr.52,
Pr.170, Pr.171, Pr.268, Pr.563, Pr.564, Pr.891) 92
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Changing the monitored item to be output from terminal FM/AM (Pr.54 to
Pr.56, Pr.158, Pr.867) 92
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Speed display and speed setting (Pr.37, Pr.144, Pr.505) 91
5
Motor brake and stop operation — Coast to stop at the specified frequency or lower (Pr.522) 109
ADJUSTMENT
Motor brake and stop operation — DC injection brake (Pr.10 to Pr.12) 88
Motor brake and stop operation — Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous
power failure (Pr.261 to Pr.266) 106
Motor brake and stop operation — Motor stop method and start signal selection (Pr.250) 105
Motor brake and stop operation — Regeneration unit selection (Pr.30, Pr.70) 90
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current — Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM selection (Pr.72, Pr.240, Pr.260) 95
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current — Reducing mechanic resonance (speed smoothing control) (Pr.653, Pr.654)
110
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure — Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start (Pr.57, Pr.58,
Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611) 93
83
Parameter list
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure — Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 to
Pr.266) 106
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Input phase failure protection selection (Pr.251, Pr.872) 105
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Output function of fault code (Pr.76) 96
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Overspeed detection level (Pr.374) 109
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Regenerative avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.882 to Pr.886) 111
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Retry at fault occurrence (Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69) 94
Selection and protection of a motor — Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal relay function) (Pr.9,
Pr.51) 87
Selection and protection of a motor — Motor selection (general-purpose motor, IPM motor) (Pr.71) 94
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation command source and speed command source during communi-
cation operation (Pr.338, Pr.339) 107
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation mode at power-ON (Pr.79, Pr.340) 96
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation mode selection (Pr.79) 96
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Buzzer control of the operation panel (Pr.990) 113
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Operation selection of the operation panel (Pr.161) 103
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Parameter unit language switchover (Pr.145) 101
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — PU contrast adjustment (Pr.991) 113
Special operation and frequency control — PID control (Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577, C42(Pr.934)
to C45(Pr.935)) 99
Special operation and frequency control — Switching between the inverter and the bypass operation (Pr.135 to Pr.139,
Pr.159) 101
Useful function (energy saving operation) — Energy saving monitor (Pr.891 to Pr.899) 112
Useful functions — Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999) 114
Useful functions — Current average value monitor signal (Pr.555 to Pr.557) 109
Useful functions — Fault initiation (Pr.997) 113
Useful functions — Free parameter (Pr.888, Pr.889) 111
Useful functions — Lifespan extension of the cooling fan (Pr.244) 105
Useful functions — Maintenance of parts (Pr.503, Pr.504) 109
Useful functions — Parameter clear, parameter copy, initial value change list, and automatic pa-
rameter setting (Pr.CL, ALLC, Er.CL, PCPY, Pr.CH, IPM, AUTO) 114
Useful functions — Parameter copy alarm release (Pr.989) 113
Useful functions — To display life of inverter parts (Pr.255 to Pr.259) 106
V/F pattern setting — Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr.71, Pr.100 to Pr.109) 97
V/F pattern setting — Base frequency and voltage (Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47) 86
V/F pattern setting — V/F pattern suitable for the application (Pr.14) 88
84
Parameter list
5.10.2 Display of the extended parameters
Operation Display

Press to choose
the PU operation mode.
The parameter
3. Press to choose the parameter number read
4. Turn until (Pr. 160)

appears.
5. Press to read the currently set value.

6. Turn to change it to the set value

" ".
7. Press to set.

After parameter setting is completed, press once to show the fault history and
press twice to return to the monitor display. To change settings of other parameters,
perform the operation in above steps 3 to 7.
REMARKS
If the setting has not been changed, the value does not flicker and the next parameter number appears.
Pr. 160 Description

9999
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
(Initial Value)
0 Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed. 5
ADJUSTMENT
85
Parameter list
5.10.3 Parameter list
 indicates simple mode parameters.

Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters
Name Range Description

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Manual torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46) V/F
6/4/3/2/
0 Torque boost 0.1%
1.5/1% *
0 to 30% Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.   
0 to 30% Set the torque boost when the RT signal is on.

46 Second torque boost 0.1% 9999   
9999 Without second torque boost
* Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (0.75K / 1.5K to 3.7K / 5.5K, 7.5K / 11K to 37K / 45K, 55K / 75K or higher)
Limiting the output frequency — Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18)
120/
1 Maximum frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz *1, 0 to 120Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency.   
*2
2 Minimum frequency 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.   
High speed maximum 120/

120 to 400Hz Set when performing the operation at 120Hz
18 0.01Hz 60Hz *1,   
frequency *2
*3 or more.
*1 The setting depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75k or higher)

*3 Even if a value higher than the maximum frequency (refer to page 43) is set in Pr.18 under IPM motor control, the high speed maximum frequency is limited
to the maximum motor frequency.
V/F
V/F pattern setting — Base frequency and voltage (Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47)
S MFVC
Set the frequency when the rated motor torque

3 Base frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)
  
0 to 1000V Set the base voltage.

Base frequency
19 0.1V 9999 8888 95% of power supply voltage   
voltage
9999 Same as power supply voltage
Set the base frequency when the RT signal is
Second V/F (base 0 to 400Hz
47 0.01Hz 9999 ON.   
frequency)
9999 Second V/F is invalid
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Multi-speed setting operation
(Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239)
Multi-speed setting
4 0.01Hz 60Hz * 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RT signal is ON.   
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting
5 0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RM signal is ON.   
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
6 0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RL signal is ON.   
(low speed)
24
Multi-speed setting (4 0 to 400Hz,
to 0.01Hz 9999 Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be   
speed to 7 speed) 9999
27 set according to the combination of the RH,
232 RM, RL and REX signals.
Multi-speed setting (8 0 to 400Hz, 9999: not selected
to 0.01Hz 9999   
speed to 15 speed) 9999
239
86
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Acceleration/deceleration time setting
(Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.147, Pr.791, Pr.792)
0.1/ 0 to 3600/
7 Acceleration time
0.01s
5s/15s *1
360s
Set the motor acceleration time.   
0.1/ 10s/30s 0 to 3600/

8 Deceleration time
0.01s *1 360s
Set the motor deceleration time.   
Set the frequency referenced as acceleration/

Acceleration/
deceleration time. Set the frequency change
20 deceleration 0.01Hz 60Hz *2 1 to 400Hz   
time from stop to Pr. 20 for acceleration/
reference frequency deceleration time.
Increments: 0.1s Increments and setting

0
Acceleration/ Range: 0 to 3600s range of acceleration/
21 deceleration time 1 0 deceleration time   
increments Increments: 0.01s setting can be
1
Range: 0 to 360s changed.
Second acceleration/ 0.1/ 0 to 3600/ Set the acceleration/deceleration time when

44 5s   
deceleration time 0.01s 360s the RT signal is ON.
0 to 3600/ Set the deceleration time when the RT signal is
Second deceleration 0.1/ 360s ON.
45 9999   
time 0.01s
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
Frequency when automatically switching to
Acceleration/ 0 to 400Hz the acceleration/deceleration time of Pr. 44
147 deceleration time 0.01Hz 9999 and Pr. 45.   
switching frequency
9999 No function
Acceleration time in the low-speed range
0 to 3600/
(less than 10% of the rated motor
360s
791 Acceleration time in 0.1/ frequency) is set.
9999   
IPM low-speed range 0.01s The acceleration time set in Pr.7 is applied.
9999 (When the second function is enabled, the
setting is applied.)
Deceleration time in the low-speed range
0 to 3600/
(less than 10% of the rated motor
360s
792 Deceleration time in 0.1/ frequency) is set.
9999   
IPM low-speed range 0.01s The deceleration time set in Pr.8 is applied.
9999 (When the second function is enabled, the
setting is applied.)
*1 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (7.5K or lower/11K or higher)
Selection and protection of a motor — Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal 5
relay function) (Pr.9, Pr.51)
Rated
Electronic thermal O/
ADJUSTMENT
0.01/ 0 to 500/
9 inverter Set the rated motor current.   
L relay 0.1A *1
current *2
0 to 3600A *1
51 0 to 500A/ Valid when the RT signal is ON.

Second electronic 0.01/ 0 to 3600A *1 Set the rated motor current.
V/F 9999   
thermal O/L relay 0.1A *1
S MFVC 9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
*1 The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
*2 Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings.(Refer to page 42)
87
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Motor brake and stop operation — DC injection brake (Pr.10 to Pr.12)
Set the operation frequency of the DC injection
0 to 120Hz *1
DC injection brake brake.
10 0.01Hz 3Hz   
operation frequency Operate when the output frequency becomes
9999
less than or equal to Pr.13 Starting frequency.
0 DC injection brake disabled
DC injection brake
11 0.1s 0.5s Set the operation time of the DC injection   
operation time 0.1 to 10s
brake.
12 0 DC injection brake disabled
DC injection brake
V/F 0.1% 4/2/1% *2   
operation voltage 0.1 to 30% Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).
S MFVC
*1 Under IPM motor control, the frequency is fixed at 0Hz even if Pr.11"0."
*2 Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (7.5K or lower/11K to 55K/75K or higher)
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Starting frequency (Pr.13, Pr.571)
Starting frequency can be set.
If the set frequency is set higher than the start
13 Starting frequency 0.01Hz 0.5Hz * 0 to 60Hz
frequency under IPM motor control, the output
  
starts at 0.01Hz.
571 0.0 to 10.0s Set the holding time of Pr.13 Starting frequency.
V/F Holding time at a start 0.1s 9999   
S MFVC 9999 Holding function at a start is invalid
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings.(Refer to page 42)
V/F pattern setting — V/F pattern suitable for the application (Pr.14) V/F
0 For constant-torque load

14 Load pattern selection 1 1   
1 For reduced-torque load
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Jog operation (Pr.15, Pr.16)
15 Jog frequency * 0.01Hz 5Hz * 0 to 400Hz Set the frequency for jog operation.   
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for jog
operation. Set the time taken to reach the
frequency set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
Jog acceleration/ 0.1/ 0 to 3600/
16 0.5s reference frequency for acceleration/deceleration   
deceleration time 0.01s 360s
time. (Initial value is 60Hz *)
In addition, acceleration/deceleration time
cannot be set separately.
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings.(Refer to page 42)
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Logic selection of the output stop
signal (MRS) (Pr.17)
0 Open input always
Normally closed input (NC contact input

2
17 MRS input selection 1 0 specifications)   
External terminal:Normally closed input
(NC contact input
4
specifications)
Communication: Normally open input
18 Refer to Pr.1 and Pr.2.
19 Refer to Pr.3.
20, 21 Refer to Pr.7 and Pr.8.
88
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Stall prevention (Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48,
Pr.49, Pr.66, Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.154, Pr.156, Pr.157)
Stall prevention operation selection becomes
0
invalid.
Stall prevention
22 0.1% 120% * Set the current value at which stall prevention   
operation level 0.1 to 150%
operation is started.
9999 Analog variable
Stall prevention The stall operation level can be reduced when
23 0 to 200% operating at a high speed above the rated
operation level
V/F 0.1% 9999 frequency.   
compensation factor
S MFVC
at double speed 9999 Constant according to Pr. 22
Second stall 0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
48 prevention operation 0.1% 120%   
current 0.1 to 150% The stall prevention operation level can be set.
0 Second stall prevention operation invalid

Second stall
0.01 to Set the frequency at which stall prevention
49 prevention operation 0.01Hz 0Hz   
400Hz operation of Pr. 48 is started.
frequency
9999 Pr. 48 is valid when the RT signal is ON.
66 Stall prevention
Set the frequency at which the stall operation
V/F operation reduction 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz   
level starts being reduced.
S MFVC starting frequency
Stall prevention level
148 0.1% 120% 0 to 150% Stall prevention operation level can be   
at 0V input
changed by the analog signal input to terminal
Stall prevention level 1.
149 0.1% 150% 0 to 150%   
at 10V input
With output voltage You can select
0
reduction whether to use output
voltage reduction   
Without output voltage during stall prevention
1
reduction operation or not.
154 Voltage reduction
Use these settings
V/F selection during stall 1 1 With output voltage
10 when the overvoltage   
S MFVC prevention operation reduction protective function
(E.OV) activates
during stall prevention
Without output voltage operation in an
11   
reduction application with large
load inertia.
Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use stall 5
Stall prevention 0 to 31,
156 1 0 prevention or not according to the acceleration/   
operation selection 100, 101
deceleration status.
ADJUSTMENT
Set the output start time of the OL signal output

0 to 25s
157 OL signal output timer 0.1s 0s when stall prevention is activated.   
9999 Without the OL signal output
24 to 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Compensation of multi speed and
remote setting inputs (Pr.28)
Multi-speed input 0 Without compensation
28 compensation 1 0   
selection 1 With compensation
89
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Acceleration/deceleration patterns
and backlash measures (Pr.29, Pr.140 to Pr.143)
0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
Acceleration/ 2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
29 deceleration pattern 1 0 3 Backlash measures   
selection 6
V/F Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration
S MFVC
Backlash acceleration
140 0.01Hz 1Hz 0 to 400Hz   
stopping frequency
Backlash acceleration
141 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s Set the stopping frequency and time for   
stopping time
backlash measures.
Backlash deceleration Valid when Pr.29 = "3"
142 0.01Hz 1Hz 0 to 400Hz   
stopping frequency
Backlash deceleration
143 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s   
stopping time
Motor brake and stop operation — Regeneration unit selection (Pr.30, Pr.70)
Inverter without regenerative function, brake
0
unit (FR-BU2 *2, FR-BU, BU)
Brake unit (FR-BU2 *3, MT-BU5),
1 *1
power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
High power factor converter (FR-HC2),
2 power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV)
Inverter without
regenerative function,
10
brake unit (FR-BU2 *2,
FR-BU, BU) DC feeding mode 1
Regenerative function (operated by DC
30 1 0 Brake unit (FR-BU2 *3, feeding only)   
selection
MT-BU5),
11 *1
power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)
Inverter without
regenerative function,
20
brake unit (FR-BU2 *2,
FR-BU, BU) DC feeding mode 2
(operated by switching
Brake unit (FR-BU2 *3, between AC and DC)
MT-BU5),
21 *1
power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)
Set this parameter when a brake unit or
Special regenerative
70 0.1% 0% 0 to 10% power regeneration converter is used.   
brake duty
(Setting can be made for the 75K or higher.)
*1 Pr.30 can be set to "1, 11, or 21" for 75K or higher.
*2 Used in combination with GZG, GRZG, or FR-BR.
*3 Used in combination with MT-BR5.
90
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Limiting the output frequency — Avoiding the mechanic resonance points
(frequency jump) (Pr.31 to Pr.36, Pr.552)
0 to 400Hz,
31 Frequency jump 1A 0.01Hz 9999
9999
  
0 to 400Hz,
32 Frequency jump 1B 0.01Hz 9999
9999
  
0 to 400Hz,
9999 1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency   
jumps (3-point jump)
0 to 400Hz, 9999: Function invalid
9999
  
0 to 400Hz,
9999
  
0 to 400Hz,
9999
  
A total of six jump ranges can be set by

setting the common jump range for the
Frequency jump 0 to 30Hz
552 0.01Hz 9999 frequencies set in Pr.31 to Pr.36. (6-point   
range jump)
9999 3-point jump
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Speed display and speed setting (Pr.37,
Pr.144, Pr.505)
0 Frequency display, setting
37 Speed display 1 0 *1   
1 to 9998 Set the machine speed of Pr. 505.
0, 2, 4, 6, 8,
Speed setting Set the number of motor poles when displaying
144 1 4 *2 10, 102,104,   
switchover 106,108, 110
the motor speed.
Speed setting Set the frequency that will be the basis of

505 0.01Hz 60Hz *2 1 to 120Hz   
reference machine speed display.
*1 Performing IPM parameter initialization sets back the settings to the initial settings. (Refer to page 42)
Detection of output frequency and current — Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, and
FU2 signals) (Pr.41 to Pr.43, Pr.50, Pr.870)
Up-to-frequency
41 0.1% 10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns ON.   
sensitivity
Output frequency Set the frequency where the FU signal turns
42 0.01Hz 6Hz 0 to 400Hz
ON.
  
detection
Output frequency Set the frequency where the FU signal turns
43 detection for reverse 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz ON in reverse rotation.
  
5
rotation 9999 Same as Pr.42 setting
Second output Set the frequency where the FU2 signal turns
ADJUSTMENT
50 0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz ON.   

frequency detection
Speed detection The hysteresis range for the detected
870 0.01Hz 0Hz * 0 to 5Hz   
hysteresis frequency is set.
44, 45 Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
46 Refer to Pr. 0.
47 Refer to Pr. 3.
48, 49 Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 23.
50 Refer to Pr. 41 to Pr. 43.
51 Refer to Pr. 9.
91
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Changing DU/PU monitored items and
clearing cumulative monitors (Pr.52, Pr.170, Pr.171, Pr.268, Pr.563, Pr.564, Pr.891)
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, Select the monitor to be displayed on the
DU/PU main display 17, 20, 23 to operation panel and parameter unit.
52 1 0
The setting value of "9" is available only for the
  
data selection 25, 50 to 57,
100* 75K or higher.
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
Set the maximum value when monitoring from
10
170 Watt-hour meter clear 1 9999 communication to 0 to 9999kWh.   
Set the maximum value when monitoring from
9999
communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
Operation hour meter Set "0" to clear the operation time monitor.
171 1 9999 0, 9999
Setting "9999" has no effect.
  
clear
0 Displays the monitor as integral value.
Monitor decimal digits
268 1 9999 1 Displays the monitor in increments of 0.1.   
selection
9999 No fixed decimal position
Energization time The numbers of cumulative energization time

563 1 0 (0 to 65535) monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed.   
carrying-over times Reading only
Operating time The numbers of operation time monitor

564 1 0 (0 to 65535) exceeded 65535h is displayed.   
carrying-over times Reading only
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative
0 to 4 power monitor digit.
Cumulative power Clamps the monitor value at maximum.
891 monitor digit shifted 1 9999   
No shift
times 9999 Clears the monitor value when it exceeds the
maximum value.
* On the unit I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal states and the lower the output terminal states.
- Display example -
RM RH AU STOP RES STF JOG CS
Input Terminals When signals STF,
RL RT MRS STR RH and RUN are ON
Hz MON P.RUN
A
PU EXT NET
V
REV FWD
Center line is always ON
RUN OL
ABC1 SU FU Output terminal
ABC2 IPF
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Changing the monitored item to be output
from terminal FM/AM (Pr.54 to Pr.56, Pr.158, Pr.867)
FM terminal function 1 to 3, 5, 6, Select the monitor output to terminal FM.
54 1 1 8 to 14, 17, 21, The setting value of "9" is available only for the   
selection 24, 50, 52, 53 75K or higher.
Frequency monitoring Set the full-scale value to output the output

55 0.01Hz 60Hz *2 0 to 400Hz frequency monitor value to terminal FM and   
reference AM.
Rated
Current monitoring 0.01/ 0 to 500/ Set the full-scale value to output the output current
56 inverter
0 to 3600A *1 monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
  
reference 0.1A *1
current *2
AM terminal function 1 to 3, 5, 6, Select the monitor output to terminal AM.

158 1 1 8 to 14, 17, 21, The setting value of "9" is available only for the   
selection 24, 50, 52, 53 75K or higher.
867 AM output filter 0.01s 0.01s 0 to 5s Set the output filter of terminal AM.   
*1 The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75K or higher)
92
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure — Automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure/flying start (Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611)
V/F control,
Simple magnetic IPM motor control
flux vector control
The coasting time is
0 as follows:
1.5K or lower.....0.5s,
57 Restart coasting time 0.1s 9999
2.2K to 7.5K ......1.0s,
No coasting time   
11K to 55K ........3.0s,
75K or higher ....5.0s
0.1 to 5s/ Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart
0.1 to 30s * after an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
58
V/F Restart cushion time 0.1s 1s 0 to 60s Set a voltage starting time at restart.   
S MFVC
V/F control,
Simple magnetic IPM motor control
flux vector control
Frequency search only
0 performed at the first
start Frequency search
Automatic restart after Reduced voltage start only performed at the
162 instantaneous power 1 0 only performed at the first start   
1
failure selection first start (no frequency
search)
Frequency search at
10
every start
Frequency search at
Reduced voltage at every start
11 every start (no
frequency search)
163 First cushion time for
V/F 0.1s 0s 0 to 20s   
S MFVC
restart Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider according to the magnitude of load
164 First cushion voltage (moment of inertia/torque).
V/F 0.1% 0% 0 to 100%   
S MFVC
for restart
165 Stall prevention Consider the rated inverter current as 100%

V/F operation level for 0.1% 120% 0 to 150% and set the stall prevention operation level    5
S MFVC restart during restart operation.
0 Without rotation direction detection

ADJUSTMENT
Rotation direction 1 With rotation direction detection

299
V/F detection selection at 1 9999 When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is   
S MFVC restarting 9999
detected.
When Pr. 78 = "1", "2", the rotation direction is
not detected.
Set the acceleration time to reach the Pr. 20
0 to 3600s Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency at
Acceleration time at a a restart.
611 0.1s 5/15s *   
restart
Acceleration time for restart is the normal
9999
acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).
* The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
93
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Remote setting function (Pr.59)
RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting
function storage function
0 Multi-speed setting 
1 Used
2 Not used
Remote setting No (Turning STF/STR
Remote function 3 OFF clears remotely-
59 1 0   
selection set frequency.)
11 Remote setting Used
12 (These setting values Not used
enable deceleration to Not used (Turning
the frequency lower STF/STR OFF clears
13 than the set remotely-set
frequency.) frequency.)
Energy saving operation — Energy saving control selection (Pr.60) V/F
0 Normal operation mode

Energy saving control
60 1 0 4 Energy saving operation mode   
selection
9 Optimum excitation control mode
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Retry at fault occurrence (Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69)
65 Retry selection 1 0 0 to 5 A fault for retry can be selected.   
0 No retry function
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. A
1 to 10 fault output is not provided during retry
Number of retries at operation.
67 1 0   
fault occurrence Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
(The setting value - 100 is the number of
101 to 110
retries.) A fault output is provided during retry
operation.
Set the waiting time from when an inverter fault
68 Retry waiting time 0.1s 1s 0 to 10s   
occurs until a retry is made.
Retry count display Clear the number of restarts succeeded by
69 1 0 0   
erase retry.
67 to 69 Refer to Pr.65.
70 Refer to Pr.30.
Selection and protection of a motor — Motor selection (general-purpose motor, IPM
motor) (Pr.71)
0 Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
1
constant-torque motor
Thermal characteristic of standard motor
2
Adjustable 5 points V/F
71 Applied motor 1 0* 20
Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or   
less)
120 High-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
Premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
210
and MM-THE4
94
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current — Carrier frequency
and Soft-PWM selection (Pr.72, Pr.240, Pr.260)
V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting is displayed in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15 indicates
14.5kHz and 25 indicates 2.5kHz.
PWM frequency 0 to 15/
72
selection
1 2
0 to 6, 25 *1 IPM motor control   
0 to 5 : 2kHz
6 to 9 : 6kHz
10 to 13 : 10kHz
14, 15 : 14kHz
Pr.72 cannot be set to "25" under IPM motor
control.
0 Soft-PWM invalid
Soft-PWM operation
240 1 1 *2 When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K or   
selection 1
higher), Soft-PWM is valid.
PWM carrier frequency is constant
independently of load.
Under the following controls, perform
continuous operation at less than 85% of the
rated inverter current.
0 V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control
PWM frequency When the carrier frequency setting is 3kHz or
260 1 1 *3   
automatic switchover higher (Pr.72 3)
IPM motor control
When the carrier frequency setting is 6kHz or
higher (Pr.72  6)
Decreases PWM carrier frequency
1
automatically when load increases.
*3 Performing IPM parameter initialization sets back the settings to the initial settings. (Refer to page 42)
Frequency setting by analog input — Analog input selection, override function, analog
input compensation (Pr.73, Pr.242, Pr.243, Pr.252, Pr.253, Pr.267)
You can select the input specifications of terminal
2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) and input
specifications of terminal 1 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V).
Override and reversible operation can be
0 to 7,
73 Analog input selection 1 1
10 to 17
selected. To change the terminal 2 to the voltage   
input specification (0 to 5V/ 0 to 10V), turn
OFF(initial status) the voltage/current input
switch. To change it to the current input(0 to
20mA), turn ON the voltage/current input switch.
5
Terminal 1 added
Set the ratio of added compensation amount
242 compensation 0.1% 100% 0 to 100%   
ADJUSTMENT
when terminal 2 is the main speed.

amount (terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added
Set the ratio of added compensation amount
243 compensation 0.1% 75% 0 to 100%
when terminal 4 is the main speed.
  
amount (terminal 4)
Set the bias side compensation value of
252 Override bias 0.1% 50% 0 to 200%
override function.
  
Set the gain side compensation value of

253 Override gain 0.1% 150% 0 to 200%
override function.
  
Turn ON the voltage/

Terminal 4 input 4 to
0 current input switch
Terminal 4 input 20mA
(initial status).
267 1 0   
selection 1 Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V Turn OFF the voltage/
2 Terminal 4 input 0 to 10V current input switch.
95
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Frequency setting by analog input — Noise elimination at the analog input (Pr.74)
The primary delay filter time constant for the
Input filter time
74 1 1 0 to 8 analog input can be set.   
constant A larger setting results in slower response.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Reset selection and discon-
nected PU detection (Pr.75)
You can select the reset input acceptance,
Reset selection/ disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) connector detection function and PU
disconnected PU 0 to 3,
75 1 14 stop function.   
detection/PU stop 14 to 17
For the initial value, reset always enabled,
selection without disconnected PU detection, and with
PU stop function are set.
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Output function of fault code (Pr.76)
0 Without fault code output
Fault code output
76 1 0 1 With fault code output   
selection
2 Fault code output at fault occurrence only
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Prevention of parameter
rewrite (Pr.77)
0 Write is enabled only during a stop
Parameter write
77 1 0 1 Parameter write is disabled.   
selection
Parameter write is enabled in any operation
2
mode regardless of operating status.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Reverse motor rotation pre-
vention (Pr.78)
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
Reverse rotation
78 1 0 1 Reverse rotation disallowed   
prevention selection
2 Forward rotation disallowed
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation mode selection (Pr.79)
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation mode at power-ON (Pr.79,
Pr.340)
0 External/PU switchover mode
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
2 Fixed to External operation mode
Operation mode 3 External/PU combined operation mode 1
79 1 0   
selection 4 External/PU combined operation mode 2
6 Switchover mode
External operation mode (PU operation
7
interlock)
0 As set in Pr.79.
Started in the Network operation mode.
When the setting is "2", it will resume the pre-
1, 2
instantaneous power failure operation mode after an
instantaneous power failure occurs.
Communication
340 startup mode 1 0 Started in the Network operation mode.   
selection Operation mode can be changed between the
PU operation mode and Network operation
10, 12 mode from the operation panel.
When the setting is "12", it will resume the pre-
instantaneous power failure operation mode after an
instantaneous power failure occurs.
96
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Simple magnetic flux vector control S MFVC
and IPM motor control (Pr.80) IPM
0.4 to 55/ To select the Simple magnetic flux vector

0.01kW/ 0 to 3600kW control and IPM motor control, set the capacity
80 Motor capacity
0.1kW *1
9999 *2 *1 of the motor used.   
9999 V/F control is performed
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Simple magnetic flux vector control
S MFVC
(Pr.90)
0 to 50 Used to set the motor primary resistance value.
0.001/ 0 to 400m* (Normally setting is not necessary.)
90 Motor constant (R1)
0.01m *
9999   
Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA)
9999
constants
V/F pattern setting — Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr.71, Pr.100 to Pr.109) V/F
0 to 400Hz,
100 V/F1(first frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
9999
  
V/F1(first frequency
101 voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V   
V/F2(second 0 to 400Hz,
102 frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
9999
  
V/F2(second
103 frequency voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V   
0 to 400Hz,
104 V/F3(third frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
9999 Set each points (frequency, voltage) of   
V/F pattern.
V/F3(third frequency 9999: No V/F setting
105 voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V   
V/F4(fourth 0 to 400Hz,
106 frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
9999
  
V/F4(fourth frequency
107 voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V   
0 to 400Hz,
108 V/F5(fifth frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
9999
  
V/F5(fifth frequency
109 voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V   
71 Refer to page 94.

5
ADJUSTMENT
97
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Communication operation and setting — Initial setting of RS-485 communication
(Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.551)
Communication operation and setting — Control of parameter write by communication
(Pr.342)
Specify the inverter station number.
PU communication Set the inverter station numbers when two or
117 1 0 0 to 31 more inverters are connected to one personal   
station number
computer.
Set the communication speed.
PU communication 48, 96, 192, The setting value 100 equals the
118 1 192 communication speed.   
speed 384 For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
Stop bit length data length
0 1 bit 8 bits
PU communication
119 1 1 1 2 bits 8 bits   
stop bit length
10 1 bit 7 bits
11 2 bits 7 bits
0 Without parity check
PU communication
120 1 2 1 With odd parity check   
parity check
2 With even parity check
Set the permissible number of retries at
0 to 10 occurrence of a data receive error.
Number of PU If the number of consecutive errors exceeds
121 1 1 the permissible value, the inverter trips.   
communication retries
If a communication error occurs, the inverter
9999
will not come to trip.
0 No PU connector communication
PU communication Set the communication check time interval.

122 0.1s 9999 0.1 to 999.8s If a no-communication state persists for longer   
check time interval than the permissible time, the inverter trips.
9999 No communication check
Set the waiting time between data transmission
PU communication 0 to 150ms
123 1 9999 to the inverter and response.   
waiting time setting
9999 Set with communication data.
0 Without CR/LF
PU communication
124 1 1 1 With CR   
CR/LF selection
2 With CR/LF
Parameter values written by communication are
Communication 0
written to the EEPROM and RAM.
342 EEPROM write 1 0   
selection 1 Parameter values written by communication
are written to the RAM.
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
PU mode operation 1 operation mode control source.
551 command source 1 2   
selection Select the PU connector as the PU operation
2
mode control source.
98
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Frequency setting by analog input — Bias and gain for the frequency setting voltage
(current) (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.241, C2(Pr.902) to C7(Pr.905))
Terminal 2 frequency Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
125 0.01Hz 60Hz* 0 to 400Hz   
setting gain frequency (maximum).
Terminal 4 frequency Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain
126 0.01Hz 60Hz* 0 to 400Hz   
setting gain frequency (maximum).
Analog input display 0 Displayed in % Select the unit for
241 1 0   
unit switchover 1 Displayed in V/mA analog input display.
C2 Terminal 2 frequency Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 2

0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz   
(902) setting bias frequency input.
C3 Terminal 2 frequency Set the converted % of the bias side voltage
0.1% 0% 0 to 300%   
(902) setting bias (current) of terminal 2 input.
C4 Terminal 2 frequency Set the converted % of the gain side voltage of
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%   
(903) setting gain terminal 2 input.
C5 Terminal 4 frequency Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 4
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz   
(904) setting bias frequency input.
C6 Terminal 4 frequency Set the converted % of the bias side current
0.1% 20% 0 to 300%   
(904) setting bias (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
C7 Terminal 4 frequency Set the converted % of the gain side current
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%   
(905) setting gain (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Special operation and frequency control — PID control (Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554,
Pr.575 to Pr.577, C42(Pr.934) to C45(Pr.935))
Set the frequency at which the control is
PID control automatic 0 to 400Hz
127 0.01Hz 9999 automatically changed to PID control.   
switchover frequency
9999 Without PID automatic switchover function
10, 110 PID reverse action Deviation value signal
11, 111 PID forward action (terminal 1)
20, 120 PID reverse action Measured value input
(terminal 4)
21, 121 PID forward action Set value (terminal 2
or Pr. 133)
128 PID action selection 1 10 50 PID reverse action Deviation value signal   
input (LONWORKS, CC-
51 PID forward action Link communication)
Measured value, set 5

60 PID reverse action
value input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link
61 PID forward action
ADJUSTMENT
communication)
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter
setting is small), the manipulated variable
varies greatly with a slight change of the
measured value. Hence, as the proportional
0.1 to 1000%
129 PID proportional band 0.1% 100% band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain)   
improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
99
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time
required for integral (I) action to provide the same
0.1 to 3600s manipulated variable as the proportional (P) action.
130 PID integral time 0.1s 1s As the integral time decreases, the set point is   
reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
Set the upper limit value.
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP
0 to 100% signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/
131 PID upper limit 0.1% 9999 10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is   
equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Set the lower limit value.
If the measured value falls below the setting range,
0 to 100% the FDN signal is output.
132 PID lower limit 0.1% 9999 The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the   
measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
133 PID action set point 0.01% 9999   
9999 Terminal 2 input voltage is the set point.
For deviation lamp input, time (Td) required for
providing only the manipulated variable for the
0.01 to
proportional (P) action. As the differential time
134 PID differential time 0.01s 9999 10.00s   
increases, greater response is made to a deviation
change.
9999 No differential control.
Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of
0 to 100.0%
553 PID deviation limit 0.1% 9999 deviation amount exceeds the deviation limit value.   
9999 No function
Select the operation to be performed at the
PID signal operation 0 to 3, detection of upper, lower, and deviation limit for
554 1 0   
selection 10 to 13 the measured value input. The operation for PID
output suspension function can be selected.
If the output frequency after PID operation remains
Output interruption 0 to 3600s lower than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than the time
575 0.1s 1s set in Pr. 575, the inverter stops operation.   
detection time
9999 Without output interruption function
Output interruption Set the frequency at which the output interruption
576 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz   
detection level processing is performed.
Output interruption Set the level (Pr.577 - 1000%) to release the PID
577 0.1% 1000% 900 to 1100%   
cancel level output interruption function.
Set the coefficient on bias side (minimum) of
C42 PID display bias 0 to 500.00
0.01 9999 terminal 4 input.   
(934) coefficient
9999 Displayed in %.
C43 PID display bias Set the converted % on bias side (minimum)
0.1% 20% 0 to 300.0%   
(934) analog value current /voltage of terminal 4 input.
Set the coefficient on gain side (maximum) of the

C44 PID display gain 0 to 500.00
0.01 9999 terminal 4 input.   
(935) coefficient
9999 Displayed in %.
C45 PID display gain Set the converted % on gain side (maximum) of
0.1% 100% 0 to 300.0%   
(935) analog value current/voltage of terminal 4 input.
100
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Special operation and frequency control — Switching between the inverter and the bypass V/F
operation (Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159) S MFVC
Electronic bypass 0 Without electronic bypass sequence

135 1 0   
sequence selection 1 With electronic bypass sequence
MC switchover Set the operation interlock time of MC2 and
136 0.1s 1s 0 to 100s   
interlock time MC3.
Set the time slightly longer (0.3 to 0.5s or so)
137 Start waiting time 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 100s than the time from when the ON signal enters   
MC3 until it actually turns ON.
Inverter output is stopped (motor coast) at
0
inverter fault.
Bypass selection at a Operation is automatically switched to bypass
138 1 0   
fault operation at inverter fault (Not switched when
1
an external thermal relay operation (E.OHT) or
CPU fault (E.CPU) occurs)
Automatic switchover 0 to 60Hz
Set the frequency to switch inverter operation
frequency from to bypass operation.
139 0.01Hz 9999   
inverter to bypass
9999 Without automatic switchover
operation
Valid during automatic switchover operation
(Pr.139  9999)
When the frequency command decreases
below (Pr.139 - Pr.159) after operation is
switched from inverter operation to bypass
0 to 10Hz operation, the inverter automatically switches
operation to inverter operation and operates at
Automatic switchover the frequency of frequency command.
frequency range from When the inverter start command (STF/STR) is
159 0.01Hz 9999 turned OFF, operation is switched to inverter   
bypass to inverter
operation operation also.
Valid during automatic switchover operation
(Pr.139  9999)
When the inverter start command (STF/STR) is
9999 turned OFF after operation is switched from
inverter operation to bypass operation,
operation is switched to inverter operation and
the motor decelerates to stop.
144 Refer to Pr.37.
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Parameter unit language switchover
5
(Pr.145)
0 Japanese
ADJUSTMENT
1 English
2 Germany
PU display language 3 French
145 1 0   
selection 4 Spanish
5 Italian
6 Swedish
7 Finnish
148,149 Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
101
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Detection of output frequency and current — Detection of output current (Y12 signal) and zero
current (Y13 signal) (Pr.150 to Pr.153, Pr.166, Pr.167)
Output current Set the output current detection level.
150 0.1% 120% 0 to 150%   
detection level 100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection period.
Output current
Set the time from when the output current has
151 detection signal delay 0.1s 0s 0 to 10s
risen above the setting until the output current
  
time detection signal (Y12) is output.
Set the zero current detection level.
Zero current detection
152 0.1% 5% 0 to 150% Suppose that the rated inverter current is   
level 100%.
Set this parameter to define the period from
Zero current detection when the output current drops below the Pr.152
153 0.01s 0.5s 0 to 10s   
time value until the zero current detection signal
(Y13) is output.
Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is
Output current 0 to 10s
ON.
166 detection signal 0.1s 0.1s   
The Y12 signal ON status is retained.
retention time 9999
The signal is turned OFF at the next start.
Y12 Signal - ON Y13 Signal - ON
0 Operation continued Operation continued
Output current
167 detection operation 1 0 1 Trip (E.CDO) Operation continued   
selection 10 Operation continued Trip (E.CDO)
11 Trip (E.CDO) Trip (E.CDO)
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Condition selection for the
second functions activation (RT signal) (Pr.155)
Second function is immediately valid with ON
0
RT signal function of the RT signal.
155 validity condition 1 0 Second function is valid only during the RT   
selection 10 signal is ON and constant speed operation.
(Invalid during acceleration/deceleration)
158 Refer to Pr.54 to Pr.56.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Displaying necessary
parameters only (user group) (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
Only the simple mode parameters can be
9999
displayed.
User group read Only the parameters registered in the user
160 1 9999 1   
selection group can be displayed.
Simple mode and extended mode parameters
0
can be displayed.
Displays the number of cases registered as a
User group registered (0 to 16)
172 1 0 user group (reading only).   
display/batch clear
9999 Batch clear the user group registration
User group 0 to 999, Set the parameter numbers to be registered to
173 1 9999   
registration 9999 the user group. Read value is always "9999".
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from
0 to 999,
174 User group clear 1 9999 the user group.   
9999
Read value is always "9999".
102
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Operation selection of the operation
panel (Pr.161)
Setting dial frequency
0
setting
Key lock invalid
Setting dial
Frequency setting/key 1
potentiometer
161 lock operation 1 0   
Setting dial frequency
selection 10
setting
Key lock valid
Setting dial
11
potentiometer
162 to 165 Refer to Pr.57 and Pr.58.
166, 167 Refer to Pr.150 to Pr.153.
168, 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
170, 171 Refer to Pr.52.
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Function assignment of input
terminals (Pr.178 to Pr.189)
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14, 0: Low-speed operation command (RL)
STF terminal function 1: Middle-speed operation command (RM)
178 1 60 16, 24, 25, 60,   
selection 62, 64 to 67, 2: High-speed operation command (RH)
70 to 72, 9999 3: Second function selection (RT)
4: Terminal 4 input selection (AU)
0 to 8,
5: Jog operation selection (JOG)
10 to 12, 14,
STR terminal function 6: Selection of automatic restart after
179 1 61 16, 24, 25, 61,   
selection 62, 64 to 67,
instantaneous power failure, flying start
(CS)
70 to 72, 9999
7: External thermal relay input (OH)
RL terminal function 8: 15-speed selection (combination with three
180 1 0   
selection speeds RL, RM, RH) (REX)
0 to 8, 10: Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV
RM terminal function
181 1 1 10 to 12, 14, connection) (X10)   
selection 11: FR-HC2 connection, instantaneous power
16, 24, 25, 62,
RH terminal function 64 to 67, failure detection (X11)
182 1 2
12: PU operation external interlock (X12)
  
selection 70 to 72, 9999
14: PID control valid terminal(X14)
RT terminal function
183 1 3 16: PU/External operation switchover (X16)   
selection 24: Output stop (MRS)
0 to 8, 25: Start self-holding selection (STOP)
10 to 12, 14, 60: Forward rotation command (STF)
184
AU terminal function
1 4 16, 24, 25, (assigned to STF terminal (Pr.178) only)    5
selection 62 to 67, 61: Reverse rotation command (STR)
70 to 72, 9999 (assigned to STR terminal (Pr.179) only)
62: Inverter reset (RES)
ADJUSTMENT
JOG terminal function

185 1 5 63: PTC thermistor input (PTC) (assigned to   
selection AU terminal (Pr.184) only)
CS terminal function 64: PID forward/reverse action switchover
186 1 6
(X64)
  
selection 0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14, 65: PU/NET operation switchover (X65)
MRS terminal
187 1 24 16, 24, 25, 62, 66: External/NET operation switchover (X66)   
function selection 64 to 67, 67: Command source switchover (X67)
STOP terminal 70 to 72, 9999 70: DC feeding operation permission (X70)
188 1 25 71: DC feeding cancel (X71)   
function selection
72: PID integral value reset (X72)
RES terminal function 9999: No function
189 1 62   
selection
103
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Function assignment of output
terminals (Pr.190 to Pr.196)
0, 100: Inverter running (RUN)

1, 101: Up to frequency (SU)
RUN terminal function 2, 102: Instantaneous power failure/
190 1 0   
selection undervoltage (IPF)
3, 103: Overload warning (OL)
4, 104: Output frequency detection (FU)
5, 105: Second output frequency detection
(FU2)
7, 107: Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RBP)
(Only for the 75K or higher)
SU terminal function 0 to 5, 7, 8,
191 1 1 8, 108: Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm   
selection 10 to 19, 25, (THP)
26, 45 to 48, 10, 110: PU operation mode (PU)
57, 64, 67, 11, 111: Inverter operation ready (RY)
70, 79, 85, 12, 112: Output current detection (Y12)
90 to 96, 98, 13, 113: Zero current detection (Y13)
99, 14, 114: PID lower limit (FDN)
100 to 105, 15, 115: PID upper limit (FUP)
IPF terminal function
192 1 2 107, 108, 16, 116: PID forward/reverse rotation output   
selection 110 to 116, (RL)
125, 126, 17, —: Electronic bypass MC1 (MC1) *
145 to 148, 18, —: Electronic bypass MC2 (MC2) *
157, 164, 167, 19, —: Electronic bypass MC3 (MC3) *
170, 179, 185, 25, 125: Fan fault output (FAN)
190 to 196, 26, 126: Heatsink overheat pre-alarm (FIN)
OL terminal function 198, 199, 45, 145: Inverter running and start command is
193 1 3 9999   
selection ON(RUN3)
46, 146: During deceleration at occurrence of
power failure (retained until release)
(Y46)
47, 147: During PID control activated (PID)
48, 148: PID deviation limit (Y48)
57, 157: IPM motor control (IPM)
FU terminal function
194 1 4 64, 164: During retry (Y64)   
selection 67, 167: During power failure (Y67)
70, 170: PID output interruption (SLEEP)
79, 179: Pulse train output of output power
(Y79)
0 to 5, 7, 8,
85, 185: DC current feeding (Y85)
10 to 19,
90, 190: Life alarm (Y90)
25, 26,
91, 191: Fault output 3 (power-OFF signal)
ABC1 terminal 45 to 48, 57,
195 1 99 (Y91)   
function selection 64, 67, 70, 79,
92, 192: Energy saving average value updated
85, 90, 91,
timing (Y92)
94 to 96,
93, 193: Current average monitor signal (Y93)
98, 99,
94, 194: Fault output 2 (ALM2)
100 to 105,
95, 195: Maintenance timer signal (Y95)
107, 108,
96, 196: Remote output (REM)
110 to 116,
98, 198: Alarm output (LF)
125, 126,
99, 199: Fault output (ALM)
ABC2 terminal 145 to 148,
9999: No function
196 1 9999 157, 164, 167,   
function selection 0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative
170, 179, 185,
logic
190, 191, * Available under V/F control and Simple
194 to 196, magnetic flux vector control
198, 199, 9999
232 to 239 Refer to Pr.4 to Pr.6.
240 Refer to Pr.72.
242, 243 Refer to Pr.73.
104
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Useful functions — Lifespan extension of the cooling fan (Pr.244)
Operates at power ON
0 Cooling fan ON/OFF control invalid (The
cooling fan is always ON at power ON)
Cooling fan operation Cooling fan ON/OFF control valid
244 1 1   
selection The fan is normally on during inverter
1 operation. The fan switches ON/OFF according
to the temperature during a stop of the inverter
whose status is monitored.
V/F
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Slip compensation (Pr.245 to Pr.247)
S MFVC
0 to 50% Used to set the rated motor slip.

245 Rated slip 0.01% 9999   
9999 No slip compensation
Used to set the response time of slip
compensation. When the value is smaller,
Slip compensation
246 0.01s 0.5s 0.01 to 10s response will be faster. However, as load   
time constant inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage
(E.OV) error is more liable to occur.
Slip compensation is not made in the constant
Constant-power
0 power range (frequency range above the
range slip frequency set in Pr.3)
247 1 9999   
compensation
Slip compensation is made in the constant
selection 9999
power range.
Motor brake and stop operation — Motor stop method and start signal selection (Pr.250)
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Start signal selection (Pr.250)
The motor is coasted STF signal:
to a stop when the Forward rotation start
0 to 100s preset time elapses STR signal:
after the start signal is Reverse rotation
turned OFF. start
When 1000s to 1100s STF signal: Start
is set (Pr. 250 setting- signal
1000 to 1100s 1000)s later, the motor
STR signal: Forward/
coasts to stop. reverse signal
250 Stop selection 0.1s 9999   
STF signal:
Forward rotation start
9999 STR signal:
When the start signal Reverse rotation
is turned OFF, the start
motor decelerates to
stop. STF signal: Start 5
signal
8888
STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal
ADJUSTMENT
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Input phase failure protection selection (Pr.251,
Pr.872)
Output phase loss 0 Without output phase loss protection
251 1 1   
protection selection 1 With output phase loss protection
Input phase loss 0 Without input phase loss protection
872 1 0   
protection selection 1 With input phase loss protection
252, 253 Refer to Pr.73.
105
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Useful functions — To display life of inverter parts (Pr.255 to Pr.259)
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor, main
Life alarm status circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts of the
255 1 0 (0 to 15)   
display inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm
output level or not.
Inrush current limit Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush
256 1% 100% (0 to 100%)   
circuit life display current limit circuit. Reading only
Control circuit Displays the deterioration degree of the control
257 1% 100% (0 to 100%)   
capacitor life display circuit capacitor. Reading only
Displays the deterioration degree of the main
Main circuit capacitor
258 1% 100% (0 to 100%) circuit capacitor. Reading only   
life display The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
Start measuring the main circuit capacitor life.
Switch the power supply ON again and check
Main circuit capacitor
259 1 0 0, 1 the Pr. 259 setting. Measurement is complete if   
life measuring the setting is "3". Set the deterioration degree
in Pr.258.
260 Refer to Pr.72.
Motor brake and stop operation — Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous
power failure (Pr.261 to Pr.266)
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure — Decelerate the
motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 to Pr.266)
Operation at
At power restoration
undervoltage Deceleration
during power failure
or power time to a stop
deceleration
failure
0 Coasts to a stop Coasts to a stop -
Depends on
Decelerates
1 to a stop
Decelerates to a stop Pr. 262 to Pr.
266 settings
Power failure stop Depends on
261 1 0 2
Decelerates
Accelerates again Pr. 262 to Pr.   
selection to a stop
266 settings
Automatically
Decelerates adjusts the
21 to a stop
Decelerates to a stop
deceleration
time
Automatically
Decelerates adjusts the
22 to a stop
Accelerates again
deceleration
time
Normally operation can be performed with the
Subtracted frequency initial value unchanged. But adjust the frequency
262 0.01Hz 3Hz 0 to 20Hz   
at deceleration start according to the magnitude of the load
specifications (moment of inertia, torque).
When output frequency  Pr.263
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
0 to 400Hz (output frequency - Pr.262).
Subtraction starting When output frequency < Pr.263
263 0.01Hz 60Hz *   
frequency Decelerate from output frequency
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
9999
(output frequency - Pr.262).
Power-failure 0.1/ 0 to 3600/ Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency
264 5s   
deceleration time 1 0.01s 360s set in Pr.266.
0 to 3600/ Set a deceleration slope below the frequency
Power-failure 0.1/ 360s set in Pr.266.
265 9999   
deceleration time 2 0.01s
9999 Same slope as in Pr.264
106
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Power failure Set the frequency at which the deceleration
266 deceleration time 0.01Hz 60Hz * 0 to 400Hz slope is switched from the Pr.264 setting to the   
switchover frequency Pr.265 setting.
267 Refer to Pr.73.
268 Refer to Pr.52.
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Password function (Pr.296,
Pr.297)
0 to 6, 99,
Select restriction level of parameter reading/
100 to 106,
296 Password lock level 1 9999 writing when a password is registered.   
199
9999 No password lock
1000 to
Register a 4-digit password
9998
Displays password unlock error count.
297 Password lock/unlock 1 9999
(0 to 5)* (Reading only) (Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to
  
"106")
9999 * No password lock
* Pr.297 can be set anytime as Pr.297 = "0 or 9999." However, the setting is invalid (the displayed value does not change).
299 Refer to Pr.57, Pr. 58.
Communication operation and setting — Initial setting of RS-485 communication (Pr.331
to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343, Pr.502, Pr.539, Pr.549 to Pr.551, Pr.779)
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation command source and
speed command source during communication operation (Pr.338, Pr.339)
Communication operation and setting — Control of parameter write by communication
(Pr.342)
Communication operation and command source — Selection of the NET operation mode
command source (Pr.550)
Communication operation and command source — Selection of the PU operation mode
command source (Pr.551)
RS-485 Set the inverter station number.
0 to 31 (same specifications as Pr.117 ) When "1"
331 communication 1 0
(0 to 247) (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr.551, the   
station number setting range within parentheses is applied.
3, 6, 12, 24,
RS-485 Used to select the communication speed.
332 communication speed
1 96 48, 96, 192, (same specifications as Pr.118)   
384 5
RS-485
Select stop bit length and data length. (same
333 communication stop 1 1 0, 1, 10, 11
specifications as Pr.119)   
ADJUSTMENT
bit length
RS-485
Select the parity check specifications. (same
334 communication parity 1 2 0, 1, 2
check selection
RS-485 Set the permissible number of retries at
0 to 10,
335 communication retry 1 1
9999
occurrence of a data receive error. (same   
count specifications as Pr.121)
RS-485 communication can be made, but the

0
RS-485 inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
336 communication check 0.1s 0s 0.1 to 999.8s Set the communication check time interval.   
time interval (same specifications as Pr.122)
9999 No communication check
107
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
RS-485 Set the waiting time between data transmission
0 to 150ms,
337 communication 1 9999
9999
to the inverter and response. (same   
waiting time setting specifications as Pr.123)
Communication 0 Operation command source communication

338 operation command 1 0   
source 1 Operation command source external
0 Frequency command source communication

1 Frequency command source external
Communication
Frequency command source external (When
339 speed command 1 0
there is no external input, the frequency
  
source 2 command via communication is valid, and the
external command from terminal 2 or 1 is
invalid.)
RS-485
Select presence/absence of CR/LF. (same
341 communication CR/ 1 1 0, 1, 2
LF selection
Parameter values written by communication are
Communication 0
written to the EEPROM and RAM.
342 EEPROM write 1 0   
selection 1 Parameter values written by communication
are written to the RAM.
Displays the number of communication errors
Communication error during Modbus-RTU communication.
343 count
1 0 (read only) Read only.   
Displayed only when Modbus-RTU protocol is
selected.
At error Fault At error
Indication
occurrence output removal
Coasts to Stops
0 E.SER Output
stop (E.SER)
Stop mode selection Decelerates E.SER Output Stops
1
502 at communication 1 0 to stop after stop after stop (E.SER)   
error Decelerates E.SER Without
2 Restarts
to stop after stop output
Continues
Without Operates
3 running at —
output normally
Pr. 779
Modbus-RTU communication can be made, but
0
the inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
Modbus-RTU
0.1 to Set the interval of communication check time.
539 communication check 0.1s 9999
(same specifications as Pr. 122)   
999.8s
time interval
No communication check (signal loss
9999
detection) is made)
Mitsubishi inverter After setting change,
0 (computer link) reset (switch power OFF,
549 Protocol selection 1 0 protocol then ON) the inverter.   
1 Modbus-RTU protocol applied after a reset.
0 Communication option valid

NET mode operation 1 Inverter RS-485 terminal valid
550 command source 1 9999 Automatic recognition of the communication option   
selection 9999 Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid.
Communication option is valid when the
communication option is mounted.
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
PU mode operation 1
operation mode control source.
551 command source 1 2   
selection 2 Select the PU connector as the PU operation
mode control source.
Operation frequency Motor runs at the specified frequency at a

0 to 400Hz communication error.
779 during communication 0.01Hz 9999   
Motor runs at the frequency used before the
error 9999
communication error.
108
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
340 Refer to Pr.79.
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Overspeed detection level (Pr.374) IPM
When the motor speed exceeds the speed

0 to 400Hz
Overspeed detection set in Pr. 374 under IPM motor control,
374 0.01Hz 9999   
level overspeed (E.OS) occurs, and the inverter
9999
outputs are stopped.
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Remote output function (REM
signal) (Pr.495 to Pr.497)
Remote output data
0
clear at powering OFF Remote output data is
cleared during an
Remote output data inverter reset
1
Remote output held at powering OFF
495 1 0   
selection Remote output data
10
clear at powering OFF Remote output data is
retained during an
Remote output data inverter reset
11
held at powering OFF
496 Remote output data 1 1 0 0 to 4095   
Output terminal can be switched ON and OFF.
497 Remote output data 2 1 0 0 to 4095   
502 Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
Useful functions — Maintenance of parts (Pr.503, Pr.504)
Displays the cumulative energization time of
the inverter in 100h increments.
When Pr.503 = "1 to 9998", writing the setting
503 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 (1 to 9998)
value of "0" clears the cumulative energization
  
time.
(Writing is disabled when Pr.503 = "0".)
Set the time taken until when the maintenance
Maintenance timer 0 to 9998
504 1 9999 timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.   
alarm output set time
9999 No function
505 Refer to Pr.37.
Motor brake and stop operation — Coast to stop at the specified frequency or lower
(Pr.522)
Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop
Output stop 0 to 400Hz
522 0.01Hz 9999 (output shutoff).   
frequency
9999 No function
539, 549,
Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
550
5
551 Refer to Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
552 Refer to Pr.31 to Pr.36
ADJUSTMENT
553, 554 Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.

Useful functions — Current average value monitor signal (Pr.555 to Pr.557)
Set the time taken to average the current
555 Current average time 0.1s 1s 0.1 to 1.0s
during start pulse output (1s).
  
Data output mask Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient
556 0.1s 0s 0.0 to 20.0s
state data.
  
time
Current average
0.01/ Rated
value monitor signal 0 to 500/ Set the reference (100%) for outputting the
557 0.1A inverter
0 to 3600A *1 signal of the current average value.
  
output reference *1 current *2
current
*1 Setting increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
109
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
563, 564 Refer to Pr.52.
571 Refer to Pr.13.
575 to 577 Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current — Reducing V/F
mechanic resonance (speed smoothing control) (Pr.653, Pr.654) S MFVC
Speed smoothing The torque fluctuation is reduced to reduce

653 0.1% 0% 0 to 200%   
control vibration due to mechanical resonance.
Speed smoothing Set the minimum value for the torque
654 0.01Hz 20Hz 0 to 120Hz   
cutoff frequency variation cycle (frequency).
779 Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Pulse train output of output
power (Y79 signal) (Pr.799)
0.1kWh,
Pulse increment 1kWh, Pulse train output of output power (Y79) is
799 setting for output 0.1kWh 1kWh 10kWh, output in pulses at every output current   
power 100kWh, (kWh) that is specified.
1000kWh
IPM motor control — Control method selection (Pr.800) IPM
IPM motor test operation (Motor is not

Control method 9
800 1 20 driven even if it is connected.)   
selection
20 Normal operation (Motor can be driven.)
IPM motor control — Proportional gain setting for speed loops (Pr.820, Pr.821) IPM
The proportional gain during speed control

is set. (Setting this parameter higher
Speed control P gain
820 1% 25% 0 to 1000% improves the trackability for speed   
1
command changes. It also reduces the
speed fluctuation due to a load fluctuation.)
The integral time during speed control is set.
Speed control integral (Setting this parameter lower shortens the
821 0.001s 0.333s 0 to 20s   
time 1 return time to the original speed when the
speed fluctuates due to external forces. )
872 Refer to Pr.251.
110
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Regenerative avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.882
to Pr.886)
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Regenerative avoidance operation
(Pr.665, Pr.882 to Pr.886)
0 Regeneration avoidance function invalid
Regeneration Regeneration avoidance function is always
1
882 avoidance operation 1 0 valid   
selection Regeneration avoidance function is valid only
2
during a constant speed operation
Set the bus voltage level at which
regeneration avoidance operates. When the
Regeneration bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage
DC380V
883 avoidance operation 0.1V
/760V *1
300 to 800V error will be less apt to occur. However, the   
level actual deceleration time increases.
The set value must be higher than the power
supply voltage  2 .
Regeneration
avoidance at Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage
884 1 0 0 to 5 change.   
deceleration detection 1 (Low)  5 (High)
sensitivity
Regeneration 0 to 30Hz
Set the limit value of frequency which rises at
avoidance activation of regeneration avoidance function.
885 0.01Hz 6Hz *2   
compensation
9999 Frequency limit invalid
frequency limit value
Regeneration Adjust responsiveness at activation of
886 avoidance voltage 0.1% 100% 0 to 200% regeneration avoidance. Setting a larger value   
gain in Pr.886 will improve responsiveness to the
bus voltage change. However, the output
Regeneration frequency could become unstable. When
665 avoidance frequency 0.1% 100% 0 to 200% vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the   
gain Pr.886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr.665.
*1 The initial value differs according to the voltage level. (200V / 400V)
Useful functions — Free parameter (Pr.888, Pr.889)

Parameters you can use for your own
888 Free parameter 1 1 9999 0 to 9999
purposes.
  
Used for maintenance, management, etc. by
setting a unique number to each inverter when
889 Free parameter 2 1 9999 0 to 9999   
multiple inverters are used.
5
ADJUSTMENT
111
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Useful function (energy saving operation) — Energy saving monitor (Pr.891 to Pr.899)
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative
0 to 4 power monitor digit.
Cumulative power Clamps the monitor value at maximum.
891 monitor digit shifted 1 9999   
No shift
times 9999 Clears the monitor value when it exceeds the
maximum value.
Set the load factor for commercial power-
supply operation.
892 Load factor 0.1% 100% 30 to 150% This value is used to calculate the power   
consumption estimated value during
commercial power supply operation.
Energy saving Rated Set the motor capacity (pump capacity). Set
0.01/ 0.1 to 55/ when calculating power saving rate, power
893 monitor reference
0.1kW *
inverter
0 to 3600kW * saving rate average value, commercial power
  
(motor capacity) capacity supply operation power.
Control selection 0 Discharge damper control (fan)

during commercial 1 Inlet damper control (fan)
894 1 0   
power-supply 2 Valve control (pump)
operation 3 Commercial power-supply drive (fixed value)
Consider the value during commercial power-
0
Power saving rate supply operation as 100%
895 1 9999   
reference value 1 Consider the Pr.893 setting as 100%.
9999 No function
Set the power unit cost. Displays the power
0 to 500
896 Power unit cost 0.01 9999 saving rate on the energy saving monitor   
9999 No function
0 Average for 30 minutes
Power saving monitor
897 1h 9999 1 to 1000h Average for the set time   
average time
9999 No function
0 Cumulative monitor value clear
1 Cumulative monitor value hold
Power saving
898 cumulative monitor 1 9999 Cumulative monitor continue (communication   
10
data upper limit 9999)
clear
Cumulative monitor continue (communication
9999
data upper limit 65535)
Use for calculation of annual power saving
Operation time rate 0 to 100% amount. Set the annual operation ratio
899 0.1% 9999 (consider 365 days  24h as 100%).   
(estimated value)
9999 No function
112
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Parameter list
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Adjustment of terminal FM and AM
(calibration) (C0(Pr.900), C1(Pr.901))
C0 FM terminal Calibrate the scale of the meter connected to
--- --- ---   
(900) calibration terminal FM.
C1 AM terminal Calibrate the scale of the analog meter

--- --- ---   
(901) calibration connected to terminal AM.
C2 (902)
to Refer to Pr.125 and Pr.126.
C7 (905)
C42 (934)
to Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
C45 (935)
Useful functions — Parameter copy alarm release (Pr.989)
Parameter copy Parameters for alarm release at parameter
989 1 10/100 * 10/100 *   
alarm release copy
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Buzzer control of the operation panel
(Pr.990)
0 Without buzzer
990 PU buzzer control 1 1   
1 With buzzer
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — PU contrast adjustment (Pr.991)
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the
PU contrast parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be
991 1 58 0 to 63   
adjustment performed.
0 (Light)  63 (Dark)
Useful functions — Fault initiation (Pr.997)
16 to 18,
32 to 34, 48,
49, 64, 80 to
82, 96, 97,
112, 128,
The setting range is same with the one for
129, 144,
fault data codes of the inverter (which can
145, 160,
be read through communication). (Refer to
161,
997 Fault initiation 1 9999 page 116)   
176 to 179,
Written data is not stored in EEPROM.
192 to 194,
196 to 199,
5
208, 230,
241, 245 to
ADJUSTMENT
247, 253
This setting does not initiate a fault.
9999
(The read value is always "9999.")
113
Parameter list
Parameter
All parameter
Parameter
Parameter
clear
clear
copy
Incre- Initial
parameters

Related
ments Value
: enabled
: disabled
IPM motor control — IPM parameter initialization (Pr.998)
Parameter settings for a general-purpose
0
motor (frequency)
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM
1
motor MM-EF (rotations per minute)
12 high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS and
IPM parameter MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
998 initialization
1 0   
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM
101
motor MM-EF (frequency)
112 high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS and
MM-THE4 (frequency)
22, 32, 122,
132
Useful functions — Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999)
10 GOT initial setting (PU connector)
11 GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminals)
20 Rated frequency is 50Hz
21 Rated frequency is 60Hz
Automatic parameter
999 1 9999 30
Acceleration/deceleration time   
setting (0.1s increment)
Acceleration/deceleration time
31
(0.01s increment)
No action
9999
(The read value is always "9999.")
Useful functions — Parameter clear, parameter copy, initial value change list, and auto-
matic parameter setting (Pr.CL, ALLC, Er.CL, PCPY, Pr.CH, IPM, AUTO)
Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration
Pr.CL Parameter clear 1 0 0, 1
parameters to the initial values.
ALLC All parameter clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.
Er.CL Faults history clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" will clear eight past faults.
0 Cancel
1 Read the source parameters to the operation panel.
PCPY Parameter copy 1 0 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the
2
destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
Initial value change Changed parameters (changed from the initial settings) are
Pr.CH --- --- ---
displayed or set.
list
When "1 or 12" is set, the parameters required to drive an IPM
IPM parameter 0, 1, 12
IPM 1 0 motor are automatically changed as a batch.
initialization
Parameter settings are changed as a batch. Those include
Automatic parameter communication parameter settings for a GOT connection,
AUTO --- --- ---
rated frequency settings of 50Hz/60Hz, and acceleration/
setting
deceleration time increment settings.
114
Reset method of protective function
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to one of the following
fault or alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales
representative or distributor.
 Retention of fault output signal.................When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the
inverter is opened when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be
lost and the fault output will not be held.
 Fault or alarm indication ...........................When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically
switches to the fault or alarm indication
 Resetting method .....................................When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 115.)
 When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly categorized as below.
(1) Error message

A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-
PU04/FR-PU07) is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warning
The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will
lead to a fault.
(3) Alarm
The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
REMARKS
· Past eight faults can be displayed using the setting dial. (Refer to page 131 for the operation.)
6.1 Reset method of protective function

The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal accumulated heat value
of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Inverter recovers about 1s after the reset is released. TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation 1:...... Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when a fault occurs. (Refer to page 121 for
fault.))
Operation 2:...... Switch power OFF once. After the indicator of the operation panel turns ON
OFF, switch it ON again.
OFF 6
Operation 3:...... Turn ON the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is
Inverter
kept ON, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a
reset status.)
RES
SD
CAUTION
· OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter fault with the start signal
ON restarts the motor suddenly.
115
List of fault or alarm display
6.2 List of fault or alarm display

Fault Refer Fault Refer
Operation Panel Operation Panel
Name data to Name data to
Indication Indication
code page code page
E.SOT* Loss of synchronism 97
E--- Faults history — 131 125
IPM detection (H61)
HOLD Operation panel lock — 117 Output side earth
128
E.GF (ground) fault 125
(H80)
LOCD Password locked — 117 overcurrent
Error message
129
E.LF Output phase loss 125
to (H81)
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error — 117
External thermal relay 144
E.OHT 126
operation (H90)
to PTC thermistor 145
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error — 118 E.PTC* 126
operation (H91)
160
Err. Error — 118 E.OPT Option fault 126
(HA0)
Stall prevention Communication option 161
OL — 119 E.OP1 126
(overcurrent) fault (HA1)
Stall prevention 241
oL — 119 E. 1 Option fault 127
(overvoltage) (HF1)
Regenerative brake Parameter storage 176
RB — 120 E.PE 127
pre-alarm device fault (HB0)
Warning
Electronic thermal 177

TH relay function pre- — 120 E.PUE PU disconnection 127
(HB1)
alarm
178
E.RET Retry count excess 127
PS PU stop — 119 (HB2)
Maintenance signal Parameter storage 179
MT — 120 E.PE2* 127
output device fault (HB3)
245
E. 5
Fault
CP Parameter copy — 120 (HF5)

246
Alarm
E. 6
FN Fan alarm — 120 (HF6)
CPU fault 128
247
E. 7
Overcurrent trip during 16 (HF7)
E.OC1 121
acceleration (H10) 192
E.CPU
Overcurrent trip during 17 (HC0)
E.OC2 121
constant speed (H11) RS-485 terminal
193
Overcurrent trip during 18 E.CTE power supply short 128
E.OC3 122 (HC1)
deceleration or stop (H12) circuit
Regenerative 24VDC power output 194
32 E.P24 128
E.OV1 overvoltage trip during 122 short circuit (HC2)
(H20)
acceleration Output current
196
Regenerative E.CDO* detection value 128
33 (HC4)
E.OV2 overvoltage trip during 122 exceeded
(H21)
constant speed Inrush current limit 197
E.IOH* 128
Regenerative circuit fault (HC5)
34
E.OV3 overvoltage trip during 123 Communication fault 198
(H22) E.SER* 129
deceleration or stop (inverter) (HC6)
Inverter overload trip 199
48 E.AIE* Analog input fault 129
E.THT (electronic thermal 123
Fault
(H30) (HC7)
relay function)
E.OS 208
Motor overload trip Overspeed occurrence 129
49 IPM (HD0)
E.THM (electronic thermal 123
(H31) 230
relay function) E.PID* PID signal fault 129
(HE6)
64
E.FIN Heatsink overheat 124 253
(H40) E.13 Internal circuit fault 129
(HFD)
Instantaneous power 80
E.IPF 124
failure (H50) If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
Brake transistor alarm * If an error occurs when using FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on FR-
112 PU04.
E.BE detection/internal 124
(H70)
circuit fault
81
E.UVT Undervoltage 124
(H51)
82
E.ILF* Input phase loss 125
(H52)
96
E.OLT Stall prevention stop 125
(H60)
116
Causes and corrective actions
6.3 Causes and corrective actions

(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
HOLD
Indication
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than is invalid. (Refer to page 48.)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2s to release lock.
Operation panel
LOCD
indication
Name Password locked
Description Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.
Check point --------------
Enter the password in Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating. ( Refer to
Corrective action
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)).
Operation Panel
Er1
Indication
Name Write disable error
· You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable
parameter writing.
· Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
Description
· Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped.
· The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.
· Appears if IPM parameter initialization is attempted in the parameter setting mode while Pr.72 = "25."
· Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 and Pr.552 (frequency jump). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
Check point · Check the settings of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
· Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
· Check the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. A sine wave filter cannot be used under IPM motor
control.
Operation Panel TROUBLESHOOTING

Er2
Indication
Name Write error during operation
When parameter writing was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled
Description
independently of operating status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is ON.
· Check the Pr. 77 setting. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check point
· Check that the inverter is not operating.
· Set "2" in Pr. 77.
Corrective action
· After stopping the operation, make parameter setting.
Operation Panel
Er3
Indication
6
Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Check point
Manual (Applied).)
117
Operation Panel
Er4
Indication
Name Mode designation error
· You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
Description · If a parameter write was performed when the command source is not at the operation panel (FR-
DU07).
· Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".
Check point · Check the Pr. 77 setting. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Check the Pr. 551 setting.
· After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 77.)
Corrective action · After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.
· Set Pr.551 = "2 (initial setting)". ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Operation Panel
rE1
Indication
Name Parameter read error
Description An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading.
Check point --------------
· Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 79.)
Corrective action
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
rE2
Indication
Name Parameter write error
· You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation.
Description
· An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Check point Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
· After stopping the operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 79.)
Corrective action
Operation Panel
rE3
Indication
Name Parameter verification error
· Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different.
Description
· An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check point Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
· Press to continue verification.

Corrective action
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 80.)
Operation Panel
rE4
Indication
Name Model error
· A different model was used for parameter writing and verification during parameter copy.
Description
· When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped.
· Check that the verified inverter is the same model.
Check point · Check that the power is not turned OFF or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
· Use the same model (FR-F700(P) series) for parameter copy and verification.
Corrective action
· Perform parameter copy read again.
Operation Panel
Err.
Indication
· The RES signal is ON.
· The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector).
· When the voltage drops in the inverter's input side.
Description
· While the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to separate power sources, the error may appear when turning ON the main circuit. This
is not a fault though.
· Turn OFF the RES signal.
Corrective action · Check the connection of PU and the inverter.
· Check the voltage on the inverter's input side.
118
(2) Warning
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Operation Panel FR-PU04
OL OL
Indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
acceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function increases the frequency again.
During
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function lowers the frequency until the
constant
Description overload current decreases to prevent overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
speed
decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency
operation
up to the set value.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
deceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function decreases the frequency again.
· Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.(V/F control)
· Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
· Check that the load is not too heavy.
· Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
Check point
· Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.(V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector
control)
· Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
· Check if the operation was performed without connecting a motor under IPM motor control.
· Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost value by 1% and check the motor status. (V/F control) (Refer to
page 72.)
· Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 74.)
· Reduce the load weight. Try Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80).
· Check the peripheral devices
Corrective action · Adjust the Pr.13 setting. Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting. (V/F control)
· Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
120%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level
with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention
operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
· Check the connection of the IPM motor.

oL oL
Indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
· If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the
regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in TROUBLESHOOTING
frequency to prevent overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative energy has
During
Description decreased, deceleration resumes.
deceleration · If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration
avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to
prevent overvoltage trip. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point · Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).)
The deceleration time may change.
Corrective action
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
Operation Panel
PS
FR-PU04
PS 6
Indication FR-PU07
Name PU stop
Description Stop with of PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. ( For
Pr. 75, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action Turn the start signal OFF and release with .
119

RB RB
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative brake pre-alarm
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake
duty value. For the 11K or higher, when the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial
value (Pr. 70 = "0"), this protective function is not available. If the regenerative brake duty reaches
100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
Description The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP
signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Appears only for the 75K or higher.
· Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
Check point · Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
· Increase the deceleration time.
Corrective action
· Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.

TH TH
Indication FR-PU07
Name Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the
preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E.
THM) occurs.
Description The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP
signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
· Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
Check point
· Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 51.)
· Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.
Corrective action
· Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 51.)
Operation Panel FR-PU04 ————

MT
Indication FR-PU07 MT
Name Maintenance signal output
Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
Description When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"),
this protective function does not function.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
Check point
setting. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erases the signal.

CP
Indication FR-PU07 CP
Name Parameter copy
Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or lower and 75K or
Description
higher.
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.90, Pr.158, Pr.190 to Pr.196,
Check point
Pr.557 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter
setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the
FN FN
Indication FR-PU07
Name Fan alarm
Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan
stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for an alarm.
Corrective action Check for fan failure. Please contact your sales representative.
120
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
E.OC1 OC During Acc
Indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
Description
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
· Check for sudden acceleration.
· Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.
· Check for output short circuit.
· Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is not 60Hz when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.(V/F
control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
Check point · Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vec-
tor control)
· Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to the high
voltage.) (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (IPM motor control)
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (IPM motor control)
· Increase the acceleration time.
(Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
· When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
· Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
· Set the Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control) (Refer to page
52.)
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
Corrective action
(Applied).)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage.(V/F control, Simple
magnetic flux vector control) ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (IPM motor control)
· Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, set the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start function. (IPM motor control) ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)

E.OC2 Stedy Spd OC
Indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent trip during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
Description
constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. TROUBLESHOOTING
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high
Check point · Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vec-
tor control)
· Keep load stable.
· Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
Corrective action · Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
6
(Applied).)
121

E.OC3 OC During Dec
Indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated inverter current
Description during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to
stop the inverter output.
· Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high
Check point
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vec-
tor control)
· Increase the deceleration time.
· Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
· Check the mechanical brake operation.
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
Corrective action
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
(Applied).)

E.OV1 OV During Acc
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
Description specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
· Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load)
· Check if Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is set too low like the no-load current.
Check point
· Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load
inertia.
· Decrease the acceleration time.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
Corrective action · Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
· Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". ( Refer to Chapter
4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))

E.OV2 Stedy Spd OV
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check if Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is set too low like the no-load current.
Check point
Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load
inertia.
· Keep load stable.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
Corrective action · Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
· Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
· Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". ( Refer to
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
122

E.OV3 OV During Dec
Indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
Check point Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load
inertia.
· Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
· Longer the brake cycle.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
Corrective action (Applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
· Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". ( Refer to Chapter

E.THT Inv. Overload
Indication FR-PU07
Name Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) *
If a current not less than 120% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur
Description (170% or less), the electronic thermal relay activates to stop the inverter output in order to protect the
output transistors. (Overload capacity 120% 60s inverse-time characteristic)
· Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
· Check that Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large (small). (V/F control)
Check point · Check that Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using
machine. (V/F control)
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
· Adjust the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting. (V/F control)
Corrective action · Set the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine. (V/F
control)
· Reduce the load weight.
* Resetting the inverter initializes the internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function.

E.THM Motor Ovrload
Indication FR-PU07
Name Motor overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) *
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced
cooling capability during low-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the integrated
value reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is activated
Description
to stop the inverter output when the integrated value reaches the specified value. When running a
special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the inverter TROUBLESHOOTING
output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (V/F control, Simple
Check point
magnetic flux vector control) ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
· For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor. (V/F control,
Corrective action Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
* Resetting the inverter initializes the internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function.
6
123

E.FIN H/Sink O/Temp
Indication FR-PU07
Name Heatsink overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink
overheat protection operation temperature.
Description For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or
"126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). ( Refer to Chapter
· Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
Check point · Check for heatsink clogging.
· Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that is displayed on the operation panel.)
· Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Corrective action · Clean the heatsink.
· Replace the cooling fan.

E.IPF Inst. Pwr. Loss
Indication FR-PU07
Name Instantaneous power failure
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous
power failure protective function is activated to trip the inverter in order to prevent the control circuit from
malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the fault output is not provided, and the
inverter restarts if the start signal is ON upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an
Description instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/
deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. ( Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
· Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
· Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
Corrective action
· Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). ( Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)

E.BE Br. Cct. Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name Brake transistor alarm detection/internal circuit fault
This function stops the inverter output if a fault occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake
transistors when using functions of the 75K or higher.
Description
In this case, the inverter must be powered OFF immediately.
For the 55K or lower, it appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
· Reduce the load inertia.
Check point · Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
· Check that the brake resistor selected is correct.
For the 75K or higher, when the protective function is activated even if the above measures are taken,
Corrective action replace the brake unit with a new one.
For the 55K or lower, replace the inverter.

E.UVT Under Voltage
Indication FR-PU07
Name Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions.
In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if
the power supply voltage decreases below about 150V (300VAC for the 400V class), this function
Description stops the inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+ and P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied))
· Check for start of large-capacity motor.
Check point
· Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+ and P1.
· Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
Corrective action · Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+ and P1.
· If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
124
Operation Panel FR-PU04 Fault 14

E.ILF
Indication FR-PU07 Input phase loss
Name Input phase loss
This fault is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection
and one phase of the three phase power input is lost.
Description When the setting of Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection is the initial value (Pr. 872 = "0"), this fault
does not occur. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
· Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action · Repair a break portion in the cable.
· Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.

E.OLT Stll Prev STP
Indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention stop
If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz(1.5Hz under IPM motor control) by stall prevention operation and
Description remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears and trips the inverter. OL appears while stall prevention is being
activated.
· Check the motor for use under overload. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check point · Check that a motor is connected during IPM motor control. (IPM motor control)
· Check for insufficient torque in the low-speed range under IPM motor control.
· Check the connection of the IPM motor. (IPM motor control)
Corrective action · Set the IPM motor test operation. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
· Under IPM motor control, set the longer acceleration/deceleration time in the low-speed range in
Pr.791 and Pr.792.
Operation Panel E.SOT FR-PU04 Fault 14

Indication IPM FR-PU07 Motor step out
Name Loss of synchronism detection
Stops the output when the operation is not synchronized. (This function is only available under IPM
Description
motor control.)
· Check that the IPM motor is not driven overloaded.
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the IPM motor is coasting.
Check point
· Check if a motor other than the IPM motor (MM-EFS series, MM-THE4 series, or MM-EF series) is
driven.
· Set the acceleration time longer.
· Reduce the load.
Corrective action · If the inverter restarts during coasting, set Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999," and select the
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure.
· Drive the IPM motor (MM-EFS series, MM-THE4 series, or MM-EF series).
FR-PU04
Operation Panel
Indication
E.GF
FR-PU07
Ground Fault TROUBLESHOOTING
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth
Description
(ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check point Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

E.LF E. LF
Indication FR-PU07
Name Output phase loss
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
Description
(load side) is lost.
· Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)
6
Check point · Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
· Wire the cables properly.
· Choose inverter and motor capacities that match.
Corrective action · Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use automatic restart after instantaneous
(Applied)
125

E.OHT OH Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name External thermal relay operation
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted
temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Description This function is available when "7" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
When the initial value (without OH signal assigned) is set, this protective function is not available.
· Check for motor overheating.
Check point · Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
· Reduce the load and operating duty.
Corrective action
· Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.

E.PTC
Indication FR-PU07 PTC activated
Name PTC thermistor operation
Trips when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input
connected to the terminal AU.
Description This fault is available when "63" is set in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection and AU/PTC switchover
switch is set in PTC side. When the initial value (Pr. 184 = "4") is set, this protective function is not
available.
· Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal relay protector.
· Check the motor for operation under overload.
Check point
· Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

E.OPT Option Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name Option fault
· Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when
a high power factor converter is connected.
Description
· Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr. 296 Password lock level = "0 or 100."
· Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high
Check point power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected.
· Check if password lock is activated by setting Pr. 296 = "0, 100"
· Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring.
· The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
· Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. ( Refer to
Corrective action
· To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr.296  "0,100". ( Refer
to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).).
· If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

E.OP1 Option 1 Fault
Indication FR-PU07
Name Communication option fault
Description Stops the inverter output when a communication line fault occurs in the communication option.
· Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
Check point
· Check for a break in the communication cable.
· Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
· Check the option function setting, etc.
Corrective action · Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Check the connection of communication cable.
126

E. 1 Fault 1
Indication FR-PU07
Name Option fault
Stops the inverter output if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and
Description communication option occurs.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
Check point · Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
Corrective action If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative
or distributor.
· Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (
Refer to instruction manual of each option)

E.PE Corrupt Memry
Indication FR-PU07
Name Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Description Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
Corrective action When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable
RAM write. Note that powering OFF returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.

E.PE2
Indication FR-PU07 PR storage alarm
Name Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Description Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check point ——————
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.

E.PUE PU Leave Out
Indication FR-PU07
Name PU disconnection
· This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended,
e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr.
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. This protective function is not available in
the initial setting (Pr. 75 = "14").
Description · This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more
than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU
communication retries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122
PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check point
· Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.

E.RET Retry No Over
Indication FR-PU07
Name Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter.
Description This function is available only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set. When the initial
value (Pr. 67 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Check point Find the cause of fault occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this error indication.
6
127
E. 5 Fault 5
Operation Panel E. 6 FR-PU04 Fault 6

Indication FR-PU07
E. 7 Fault 7
E.CPU CPU Fault

Name CPU fault
Description Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
Corrective action inverter.
· Please contact your sales representative.

E.CTE
Indication FR-PU07 E.CTE
Name RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
When the internal power supply for RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts off the power
output.
Description At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power OFF, then ON again.
Check point · Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
Corrective action · Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals

E.P24 E.P24
Indication FR-PU07
Name 24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
Description At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES
signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power OFF, then ON again.
Check point · Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Corrective action · Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

E.CDO
Indication FR-PU07 OC detect level
Name Output current detection value exceeded
This function stops the inverter output when the output current exceeds the setting of Pr.150 Output
current detection level, or the output current falls below the setting of Pr.152 Zero current detection level.
Description
This function is active when Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection is set to "1, 10, 11".
When the initial value (Pr. 167 = "0") is set, this fault does not occur.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time,
Pr. 152 Zero current detection level, Pr. 153 Zero current detection time, Pr. 166 Output current detection signal
Check point
retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. ( Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)

E.IOH
Indication FR-PU07 Inrush overheat
Name Inrush current limit circuit fault
Description Trips when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit fault
· Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
· Check that no meltdown is found in the input side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the inrush
Check point current suppression circuit contactor (FR-F740P-132K or higher) or no fault is found in the power
supply circuit of the contactor.
· Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
128

E.SER
Indication FR-PU07 VFD Comm error
Name Communication fault (inverter)
This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than
permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
Description
during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if
communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.

E.AIE
Indication FR-PU07 Analog in error
Name Analog input fault
Stops the inverter output when a 30mA or higher current or a 7.5V or higher voltage is input to terminal
Description 2 while the current input is selected by Pr.73 Analog input selection, or to terminal 4 while the current
input is selected by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. ( Refer to
Check point
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal
Corrective action
4 input selection to voltage input.
Operation Panel E.OS FR-PU04

E.OS
Indication IPM FR-PU07
Name Overspeed occurrence
Stops the inverter outputs when the motor speed exceeds the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level under
Description
IPM motor control. This protective function is available while the IPM motor control is selected.
Check point · Check that the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct.
Corrective action · Set the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value correctly.
FR-PU04 Fault 14
Operation Panel
E.PID Fault
Indication FR-PU07
PID Signal Error
Name PID signal fault
If any of PID upper limit (FUP), PID lower limit (FDN), and PID deviation limit (Y48) turns ON during PID
control, inverter shuts off the output. This function is active under the following parameter settings: Pr.554 PID
Description signal operation selection  "0,10", Pr.131 PID upper limit  "9999", Pr.132 PID lower limit  "9999", and Pr.553 PID
deviation limit  "9999". This protective function is not active in the initial setting (Pr.554 = "0", Pr.131 = "9999",
Pr.132 = "9999", Pr.553 = "9999").
· Check if the measured PID value is greater than the upper limit (Pr.131) or smaller than the lower limit
Check Point (Pr.132).
· Check if the absolute PID deviation value is greater than the limit value (Pr.553).
Corrective Action
Make correct settings for Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, Pr.553 PID deviation limit. ( Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))

E.13 Fault 13
Indication FR-PU07
Name Internal circuit fault
Description Trips when an internal circuit error occurred.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION
• If protective functions of E.ILF, E.SOT, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.PID are activated when using the FR-
PU04, "Fault 14" appears.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
• If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
6
129
Correspondences between digital and
actual characters
6.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters

There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters
displayed on the operation panel.
Actual Digital Actual Digital Actual Digital
0 A M
1 B N
2 C O
3 D o
4 E P
5 F S
6 G T
7 H U
8 I V
9 J r
L -
130
Check and clear of the faults history
6.5 Check and clear of the faults history

(1) Check for the faults history
Monitor/frequency setting Parameter setting

[Operation panel is used
[Parameter setting change]
for operation]
Faults history
[Operation for displaying faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists, is displayed.
*1
Output frequency Output current
Flickering Flickering
Flickering
*2
Energization time Output voltage
Flickering Flickering
Faults history number
(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Press the
setting
dial.
Flickering
Press the
setting TROUBLESHOOTING
dial.
Flickering
Press the
setting
dial.
*1 When an overcurrent trip occurs by an instant overcurrent, the monitored current value saved in the faults history may be lower than the actual
current that has flowed.
*2 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. 6
When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added
up from 0.
131
Check and clear of the faults history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
· The faults history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Faults history clear.
Operation Display
The parameter
number read
3.Turn until (faults history clear)

appears.

5.Turn to change
it to the setting value " ".
6.Press to set.
Flicker ··· Faults history clear complete!!

· Press to read another parameter.
132
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
POINT
· If the cause of malfunction is still unknown after performing applicable checks, initialization of parameter settings
is recommended. Reset the parameter settings and set the required parameters again, then perform the checks
again.
· Where is indicated in the "Refer to page" column, refer to the Instruction Manual (Applied).
6.6.1 Motor does not start

Refer
Check
Possible Cause Countermeasures to
points
page
Power ON a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic
contactor (MC). —
Appropriate power supply voltage is not applied. Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss,
(Operation panel display is not provided.) and wiring.
If only the control power is ON when using a separate
power source for the control circuit, turn ON the main 17
Main circuit power.
Circuit Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor.
If the electronic bypass function is active, check the
Motor is not connected properly. wiring of the magnetic contactor connected between the 11
inverter and the motor. (V/F control, Simple magnetic
flux vector control)
Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1.
The jumper across P/+ and P1 is disconnected.
When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper 11
(55K or lower)
across P/+ and P1, and then connect the DC reactor.
Check the start command source, and input a start
signal.
Start signal is not input. 2
PU operation mode: /
External operation mode : STF/STR signal
Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation
Both the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF, start signals (STF or STR).
19
STR) are input simultaneously. If STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously in
the initial setting, a stop command is given.
Frequency command is zero. Check the frequency command source and enter a TROUBLESHOOTING
2
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.) frequency command.
AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used for
Turn ON the AU signal.
frequency setting. 19
Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
Input Turn MRS or RES signal OFF.
Signal Inverter starts the operation with a given start command
Output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is ON.
and a frequency command after turning OFF MRS or
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
RES signal.
Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.
CS signal is OFF when automatic restart after
Turn ON the CS signal.
instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr. 57
Restart operation is enabled when restart after
6
"9999").
instantaneous power signal (CS) is ON.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering. )
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector
Jumper connector of sink - source is wrongly selected. is correctly installed.
22
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.) If it is not installed correctly, input signal is not
recognized.
Voltage/current input switch is not correctly set for analog Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch
input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA). correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with 19
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.) the setting.
133
Refer
Check
points
page
During the External operation mode, check the method
was pressed.
119
Input of restarting from a input stop from PU.
(Operation panel indication is (PS).)
Signal
Check the connection.
Two-wire or three-wire type connection is wrong. 105
Connect STOP signal when three-wire type is used.
Increase Pr. 0 setting by 0.5% increments while
Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is improper when V/F control is
observing the rotation of a motor. 72
used.
If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Check the Pr. 78 setting.
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set. Set Pr. 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to 96
only one direction.
Select the operation mode which corresponds with input
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is wrong. 2
methods of start command and frequency command.
Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings Check the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7)
99
are improper. settings.
Set running frequency higher than Pr. 13.
Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is greater than the
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal 88
running frequency.
is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
Frequency settings of various running frequency (such Set the frequency command according to the
as multi-speed operation) are zero. application. 73
Especially, Pr. 1 Maximum frequency is zero. Set Pr. 1 higher than the actual frequency used.
Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is lower than Pr. 13 Starting Set Pr. 15 Jog frequency higher than Pr. 13 Starting
88
frequency. frequency.
Parameter Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
Operation mode and a writing device do not match. 77, 108
Setting an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Start signal operation selection is set by the Pr. 250 Stop Check Pr. 250 setting and connection of STF and STR
105
selection signals.
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn
The motor is decelerated to a stop when power failure
OFF the start signal once, then turn ON again to restart. 106
deceleration stop function is selected.
The motor restarts when Pr. 261="2, 22".
 Set Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1"
(input phase failure protection active).
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
 Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous
function or power failure stop function is activated.
power failure function and power failure stop function.
(Performing overload operation during input phase loss 93, 106
 Reduce the load.
may cause voltage insufficiency, and that may result in
 Increase the acceleration time if the automatic restart
detection of power failure.)
after instantaneous power failure function or power
failure stop function occurred during acceleration.
DC feeding mode 1 or mode 2 is not selected in Pr.30
Set the DC feeding mode in Pr.30 Regenerative function
Regenerative function selection even though the DC is fed 88
selection.
through terminal P and N.
IPM motor test operation is selected under IPM motor
Set "20" in Pr.800 Control method selection. 110
control.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. —
Load
Shaft is locked. Inspect the machine (motor). —
134
6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise

When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3kHz (6kHz during IPM motor control) or more set in Pr. 72, the
carrier frequency will automatically decrease if the output current of the inverter exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated
output current on page 149. This may cause the motor noise to increase. But it is not a fault.
Refer
Check
points
page
Input
Take countermeasures against EMI.
signal Disturbance due to EMI when frequency command is
Parameter given from analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4). Increase the Pr. 74 Input filter time constant if steady
96
Setting operation cannot be performed due to EMI.
In the initial setting, Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection is
enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are
complex tone. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises 95
generated.
(metallic noises) are generated.
Set Pr. 240 = "0" to disable this function.
Set Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 and Pr.552 (Frequency jump).
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the
Resonance occurs. (output frequency) 91
natural frequency of a mechanical system, these
Parameter parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Setting Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect
Resonance occurs. (carrier frequency) 95
on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical
system or a motor.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional
band (Pr. 129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130)
Gain adjustment during PID control is insufficient. to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) 99
to a slightly shorter time.
Check the calibration of set point and measured value.
Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no
Mechanical looseness —
Others mechanical looseness.
Contact the motor manufacturer.
Motor Operating with output phase loss Check the motor wiring. —
6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise

Refer
Check
TROUBLESHOOTING
points
page
Fan cover was not correctly installed when a cooling fan
Fan Install the fan cover correctly. 145
was replaced.
6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally

Refer
Check
points
page
Motor fan is not working Clean the motor fan.
—
Motor (Dust is accumulated.) Improve the environment.
Phase to phase insulation of the motor is insufficient. Check the insulation of the motor. —
Main Check the output voltage of the inverter. 6
The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are unbalanced. 141
Circuit Check the insulation of the motor.
Parameter The Pr. 71 Applied motor setting is wrong. (V/F control, Check the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting. (V/F control,
94
Setting Simple magnetic flux vector control) Simple magnetic flux vector control)
— Motor current is large. Refer to "6.6.11 Motor current is too large" 138
135
6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction

Refer
Check
points
page
Main Phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is Connect phase sequence of the output cables (terminal
11
Circuit incorrect. U, V, W) to the motor correctly
The start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are Check the wiring. (STF: forward rotation , STR: reverse
19
connected improperly. rotation)
Input
The polarity of the frequency command is negative
signal
during the polarity reversible operation set by Pr. 73 Check the polarity of the frequency command.
Analog input selection.
6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting

Refer
Check
points
page
Frequency setting signal is incorrectly input. Measure the input signal level. —
Input
Take countermeasures against EMI such as using
signal The input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 2
86
Minimum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 99
Parameter
are improper. During IPM motor control, maximum frequency is limited
Setting 162,
to the maximum motor speed (frequency) of the IPM
164
motor.
Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are improper. Narrow down the range of frequency jump. 91
Load Reduce the load weight. —
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
Parameter Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in 89
Setting load.
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC).)
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth

Refer
Check
points
page
Acceleration/deceleration time is too short. Increase acceleration/deceleration time. 74
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
72
control, so the stall prevention function is activated. 0.5% increments to the setting.
The base frequency does not match the motor
Parameter Set Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 47 Second V/F (base
characteristics under V/F control or Simple magnetic 86
Setting frequency).
flux vector control.
If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration
Regeneration avoidance operation is performed avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886 111
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain.
Load Reduce the load weight. —
Parameter Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
Setting load.
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
136
6.6.8 Speed varies during operation

Refer
Check
points
page
97,
Load Load varies during an operation. (V/F control) Select Simple magnetic flux vector control
Frequency setting signal is varying. Check the frequency setting signal. —

Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input
96
filter time constant.
The frequency setting signal is affected by EMI.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
Input
signal
Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a
Malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable current
common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by 23
generated when the transistor output unit is connected.
undesirable current.
Multi-speed command signal is chattering. Take countermeasures to suppress chattering. —
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large. 86
3%) under V/F control.
The Pr.80 Motor capacity setting is inappropriate for the
inverter and motor capacities under Simple magnetic Check the Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting. 97
flux vector control and IPM motor control.
Adjust Pr. 0 Torque boost by increasing with 0.5%
Wiring length is too long for V/F control, and a voltage 72
increments for low-speed operation.
drop occurs.
Change to Simple magnetic flux vector control. 97
Parameter
Disable automatic control functions, such as energy
Setting
saving operation, fast-response current limit function,
regeneration avoidance function, Simple magnetic flux
vector control and stall prevention.
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for example, —
For PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID
when structural rigidity at load side is insufficient.
proportional band and Pr.130 PID integral time.
Lower the control gain, and adjust to increase the
stability.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting. 95
6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly

Refer
Check
points
page
Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
Input
Start signal (STF or STR) is ON. When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be 77
TROUBLESHOOTING
signal
changed.
When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial
value), the inverter is placed in the External operation
mode at input power ON. To switch to the PU operation
Pr. 79 setting is improper. mode, press on the operation panel (press 77
Parameter
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) .
Setting
At other settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is
limited accordingly.
Operation mode and a writing device do not Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
correspond. an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
77, 108 6
137
6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating

Refer
Check
points
page
Main
Circuit,
Power is not input. Input the power. 9
Control
Circuit
Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely.
The inverter cover may not fit properly when using wires
Front Operation panel is not properly connected to the
whose size are 1.25mm2 or larger, or when using many 6
cover inverter.
wires, and this could cause a contact fault of the
operation panel.
6.6.11 Motor current is too large

Refer
Check
points
page
72
control, so the stall prevention function is activated. 0.5% increments to the setting.
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
(V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control or Simple Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage 86
magnetic flux vector control is performed. (e.g. rated motor voltage). (V/F control, Simple magnetic
Parameter (Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19) flux vector control)
Setting Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
88
characteristic. (V/F control)
Reduce the load weight. —
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
138
6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate
Check Refer
points page
Check if the start command and the frequency
Start command and frequency command are chattering. —
command are correct.
Input The wiring length used for analog frequency command
Perform analog input bias/gain calibration.
signal is too long, and it is causing a voltage (current) drop.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
Input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2
Minimum frequency. If you want to run the motor at 120Hz 86
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings or higher, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
are improper. Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 99
During IPM motor control, maximum frequency is limited to 162,
the maximum motor speed (frequency) of the IPM motor. 164
Check the Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
The maximum voltage (current) input value is not set frequency and Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
59
during the external operation. (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.18) frequency settings. To operate at 120Hz or higher, set
Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency.
72
Parameter control, so the stall prevention function is activated. 0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
Setting
(V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control or Simple Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage 86
magnetic flux vector control is performed. (e.g. rated motor voltage). (V/F control, Simple magnetic
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19) flux vector control)
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
88
characteristic. (V/F control)
Reduce the load weight. —
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
During PID control, output frequency is automatically controlled to make measured value = set point.
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting
Check Refer
points page
Operation is being performed (signal STF or STR is
Stop the operation. TROUBLESHOOTING
Input
When Pr. 77 = "0" (initial value), write is enabled only 96
signal ON).
during a stop.
Choose the PU operation mode.
You are attempting to set the parameter in the External
Or, set Pr. 77 = "2" to enable parameter write regardless 96
operation mode.
of the operation mode.
Parameter is disabled by the Pr. 77 Parameter write
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting. 96
selection setting.
Parameter Key lock is activated by the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
103
Setting lock operation selection setting. setting.
Operation mode and a writing device do not Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
77, 108
correspond. an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Attempted to set "25" in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection Pr.72 cannot be set to "25" during the IPM motor control. 6
under IPM motor control. Attempted to perform IPM (The sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used 95
motor control while Pr.72 ="25." under IPM motor control.)
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit

Check Refer
points page
Main Check for the wiring and the installation.
Circuit,
Wiring or installation is improper. Power lamp is lit when power supply is input to the 11
Control
Circuit control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21).
139
Inspection item
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent
any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust,
dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
 Precautions for maintenance and inspection

For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When
accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and
then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/ of the inverter is not more than 30VDC
using a tester, etc.
7.1 Inspection item
7.1.1 Daily inspection

Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Unusual vibration and noise
(5) Unusual overheat and discoloration
7.1.2 Periodic inspection

Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault .............. Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening ........ The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque.
(Refer to page 14, 15.)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
140
Inspection item
7.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection

Interval
Inspection
Customer's
Area of
Check
Periodic
Corrective Action at
Inspection Item Inspection Item
Daily
Alarm Occurrence
*2
Surrounding Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity,
 Improve environment
environment dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist , etc
Check alarm location and
Check for unusual vibration and noise 
General Overall unit retighten
Check for dirt, oil, and other foreign material. *3  Clean
Power supply Check that the main circuit voltages and control
 Inspect the power supply
voltage voltages are normal *1
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit
 Contact the manufacturer
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
General (2)Check for loose screws and bolts.  Retighten
(3)Check for overheat traces on parts.  Contact the manufacturer
(4)Check for stains  Clean
(1)Check conductors for distortion.  Contact the manufacturer
Conductors, cables (2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)  Contact the manufacturer
Main Check for unusual odors and abnormal increase Stop the device and contact
Transformer/reactor 
circuit in whining sound. the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact
Terminal block Check for damage. 
the manufacturer.
Smoothing (1)Check for liquid leakage.  Contact the manufacturer
aluminum (2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge.  Contact the manufacturer
electrolytic (3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
capacitor 
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 142)
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Check that the operation is normal and no chatter
Relay/contactor  Contact the manufacturer
is heard.
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases
 Contact the manufacturer
with the inverter operated alone is balanced
Operation check (2)Check that no fault is found in protective and
display circuits in a sequence protective  Contact the manufacturer
Control operation test.
circuit Stop the device and contact
(1)Check for unusual odors and discoloration. 
protective Overall the manufacturer.
Parts check
circuit (2)Check for serious rust development  Contact the manufacturer

(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and
Aluminum  Contact the manufacturer
deformation trace
electrolytic
capacitor (2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the

control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 142.)
(1)Check for unusual vibration and noise.  Replace the fan
Fix with the fan cover fixing
Cooling fan (2)Check for loose screws and bolts 
Cooling screws
system (3)Check for stains  Clean
(1)Check for clogging  Clean
Heatsink
(1)Check that display is normal.  Contact the manufacturer
Indication
Display
Stop the device and contact
Meter Check that reading is normal 
the manufacturer.
Load Check for vibration and abnormal increase in Stop the device and contact
Operation check 
motor operation noise the manufacturer.
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
*2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
*3 Oil component of the heat dissipation grease used inside the inverter may leak out. The oil component, however, is not flammable, corrosive,nor 7
conductive and is not harmful to humans. Wipe off such oil component with a cloth, etc.
CAUTION
Continuous use of a leaked, deformed, or degraded smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor (as shown in the table above) may
lead to a burst, breakage or fire. Replace such capacitor without delay.
141
Inspection item
7.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts

The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts Judgement level
Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity
Control circuit capacitor Estimated 10% life remaining
Inrush current limit circuit Estimated 10% life remaining (Power ON: 100,000 times left)
Cooling fan Less than 50% of the predetermined speed
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (2) is
not performed. (Refer to page 143.)
(1) Display of the life alarm

· Pr. 255 Life alarm status display can be used to confirm that the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor,
cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level.
bit 15 7 0
• Pr.255 read • Pr.255 setting read
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life Bit image is displayed
bit2 Cooling fan life in decimal
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Pr. 255 Bit Inrush Current Cooling Main Circuit Control Circuit
(decimal) (binary) Limit Circuit Life Fan Life Capacitor Life Capacitor Life
15 1111
14 1110
13 1101
12 1100
11 1011
10 1010
9 1001
8 1000
7 0111
6 0110
5 0101
4 0100
3 0011
2 0010
1 0001
0 0000
: with alarm, : without alarm
POINT
Life check of the main circuit capacitor needs to be done by Pr. 259. (Refer to page 143.)
142
Inspection item
(2) Measuring method of life of the main circuit capacitor

· If the value of capacitor capacity measured before shipment is considered as 100%, Pr. 255 bit1 is turned ON when
the measured value falls below 85%.
· Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259
3) Switch power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity when the
inverter turns OFF.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is OFF, power ON again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, then read Pr. 258 and check the life of the main circuit
capacitor.
REMARKS
· When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 = "9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1").
When measuring, avoid the following conditions to perform. In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is
confirmed under the following conditions, normal measurement cannot be done.
(a)FR-HC2, MT-HC, FR-CV, MT-RC or sine wave filter is connected.
(b)Terminal R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/ and N/.
(c)Switch power ON during measuring.
(d)The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e)The motor is running.(The motor is coasting.)
(f)The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g)The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is OFF.
(h)The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i)The start command is given while measuring.
· Operating environment:Surrounding air temperature (annual average 40C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist,
dust and dirt))
Output current (80% of the rated inverter current)
POINT

For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn OFF
of the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is
applied to the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to prevent
an electric shock.
143
Inspection item
7.1.5 Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and
alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
7.1.6 Replacement of parts

The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
Part Name Estimated lifespan *1 Description

Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years *2 Replace (as required)
On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years *2 Replace the board (as required)
Relays  as required
Fuse (185K or higher) 10 years Replace the fuse (as required)
*1 Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40°C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
*2 Output current : 80% of the rated inverter current
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
144
Inspection item
(1) Cooling fan

The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit
semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed
during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
Removal (FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740P-3.7K to 160K)
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K FR-F720P-7.5K to 30K FR-F720P-37K or higher

FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K FR-F740P-7.5K to 30K FR-F740P-37K to 160K
2) Disconnect the fan connectors.
3) Remove the fan.
Fan cover Fan cover

Fan cover
Fan connection
Fan *
connector Fan *
Fan
Fan connection Fan connection
connector connector

* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
145
Inspection item
Reinstallation (FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740P-3.7K to 160K)

1)After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>

2)Reconnect the fan connectors.
FR-F720P-7.5K to 15K
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-7.5K to 18.5K
FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K FR-F720P-30K

FR-F740P-22K, 30K
FR-F720P-37K to 110K
FR-F740P-37K to 160K
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks until 1. Insert hooks into 1. Insert hooks into
you hear a click 1. Insert hooks into holes. 2. Insert hooks until holes. 2. Insert hooks until
sound. you hear a click you hear a click
holes. sound. sound.

CAUTION
Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
 Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
146
Inspection item
Removal (FR-F740P-185K or higher)

1) Remove a fan cover.
2) After removing a fan connector, remove a fan block.
3) Remove a fan. (Make sure to remove the fan cable from the clamp of the fan block beforehand.)
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
3)
Fan block
2)
Fan cover
1)
Unlock the clamp, and pull

out the cable.
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
Reinstallation (FR-F740P-185K or higher)

1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces
up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>

2) Install fans referring to the above figure.
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
• Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after
power OFF, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment
(FR-A7CN)
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the
heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement.
After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the
original position.
Top cover Inverter
147
Inspection item
(3) Smoothing capacitors

A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated
by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and operating conditions. When the
inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 144 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
(4) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).
(5) Fuse inside the inverter (185K or higher)

A fuse is used inside the inverter. Surrounding air temperature and operating condition affect the life of fuses. When the
inverter is used in a normal air-conditioned environment, replace its fuse after about 10 years.
7.1.7 Inverter replacement

The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring
cover of the inverter.
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
Before starting inverter replacement, switch power OFF, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and
such to ensure safety.
148
Rating
8 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Rating
200V class
Type FR-F720P-K 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
Rated capacity (kVA)*2 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 11.8 17.1 22.1 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165
4.2 7.0 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432
Output
Rated current (A)*3

(3.6) (6.0) (8.2) (13) (20) (26) (38) (49) (60) (72) (97) (119) (145) (180) (244) (294) (367)
Overload current rating*4 120% for 60s, 150% for 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated voltage*5 Three-phase 200 to 240V
Rated input AC voltage/
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 to 264V 60Hz
Power supply
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Without
Power supply 2.1 4.0 4.8 8.0 11.5 16 20 27 32 41 52 65 79 99 — — —
DC reactor
system capacity With DC
(kVA)*6 1.2 2.6 3.3 5.0 8.1 10 16 19 24 31 41 50 61 74 110 132 165
reactor
Protective structure (JEM 1030)*8 Enclosed type (IP20) *7 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 1.8 2.2 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5 7.8 13 13 14 23 35 35 67 70 70
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. To use a dedicated
IPM motor, refer to page 162 164.
*2 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
*3 When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output
current exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
*4 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty,
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*6 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*7 When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00).
*8 FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
SPECIFICATIONS
8
149
Rating
400V class
Type FR-F740P-K 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated capacity (kVA)*2 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12.2 17.5 22.1 26.7 32.8 43.4 53.3 64.8 80.8
2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106
Output
Rated current (A)*3

(1.8) (3.0) (4.1) (6.4) (9.8) (13) (19) (24) (30) (36) (48) (60) (72) (90)
Overload current rating*4 120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz

fluctuation
±5%
fluctuation
Without
Power supply DC reactor
2.1 4.0 4.8 8.0 11.5 16 20 27 32 41 52 65 79 99
(kVA)*6 1.2 2.6 3.3 5.0 8.1 10 16 19 24 31 41 50 61 74
reactor
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *8 Enclosed type (IP20) *7 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 13 13 23 35 35
Type FR-F740P-K 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560
Rated capacity (kVA)*2 110 137 165 198 247 275 329 366 416 464 520 586 659 733 833
144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683 770 866 962 1094
Output
Rated current (A)*3 (122) (153) (183) (221) (276) (306) (367) (408) (464) (518) (580) (654) (736) (817) (929)
Overload current rating*4 120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz

fluctuation
±5%
fluctuation
Without
Power supply DC reactor
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(kVA)*6 reactor
110 137 165 198 247 275 329 366 416 464 520 586 659 733 833
Protective structure (JEM 1030)*8 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 37 50 57 67 72 110 110 175 175 175 260 260 370 370 370
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. To use a dedicated
IPM motor, refer to page 162 164.
*2 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
*3 When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output
current exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
*4 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty,
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*6 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*7 When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00).
*8 FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
150
Common specifications
8.2 Common specifications
High carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control)/Optimum excitation control/Simple magnetic flux vector
Control method
control/IPM motor control
Output frequency range 0.5 to 400Hz
0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 10V/12-bit)
Frequency Analog input 0.03Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/approx.11-bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12-bit)
setting 0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11-bit)
resolution
Digital input 0.01Hz
Control specifications
Frequency Analog input Within 0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25°C 10°C)
accuracy Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Speed control range 1:10 under V/F control, 1:15 under Simple magnetic flux vector control, 1:10 under IPM motor control
Voltage/frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/
characteristics F can be selected.
General-purpose
Starting Under Simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation: 120% (at 3Hz)
motor control
torque
IPM motor control50%
Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/
setting deceleration modes are available.
General-purpose motor control: Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation
DC injection brake
voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed.
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 150% variable). Whether to use the function or not can be set.
Terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, and 4 to 20mA are available.
Analog input
Frequency Terminal 1: -10 to +10V and -5 to 5V are available.
setting signal 4-digit BCD or 16-bit binary using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit (when used with
Digital input
the option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed
selection, remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection,
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter run
enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV connection), FR-HC2 connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU
Input signals (twelve terminals) operation external interlock signal, PID control enable terminal, PU-External operation switchover, output
stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC
thermistor input, PID forward/reverse action switchover, PU/NET operation switchover, External/NET
operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, DC feeding cancel,
and PID integral value reset.
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection,
Operation specifications
polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, original operation
Operational functions continuation at an instantaneous power failure, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation
prevention, remote setting, second and third function, multi-speed setting, regenerative avoidance, slip
compensation, operation mode selection, PID control, and computer link operation (RS-485)
Output signal The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection): inverter running,
Open collector output (five up to frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency detection,
terminals) second output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm*1, electronic thermal relay function pre-
Relay output (two terminals) alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID
lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, electronic bypass MC1*2, electronic bypass
MC2*2, electronic bypass MC3*2, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, inverter running start
command is ON, during deceleration at occurrence of power failure, during PID control activated, PID
Operating status deviation limit, IPM motor control*6, during retry, PID output interruption, pulse train output of output power,
DC feeding, life alarm, fault output 3 (power-off signal), energy saving average value updated timing, current
average value monitor, fault output 2, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, alarm output, and fault output.
Fault code of the inverter can be output (4-bit) from the open collector.
When used with In addition to above, the following signals can be assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.319 (extension output terminal function
the FR-A7AY, FR- selection): control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, and inrush current limit circuit
A7AR (option) life. (Only positive logic can be set to the extension terminals of FR-A7AR.)
For meter The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 FM terminal function selection(pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM
Pulse train output terminal function selection (analog output): output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
(Max. 2.4kHz: one terminal) voltage, frequency setting value, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic
Analog output thermal relay load factor, input power, output power, load meter, reference voltage output, motor load factor,
(Max. 10VDC: one terminal) energy saving effect, regenerative brake duty*1, PID set point, and PID measured value.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, fault display, frequency setting value,
running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay load factor, input
Operation power, output power, load meter, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor,
panel Operating status
cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative energy savings, regenerative brake duty*1, PID set point,
Indication
(FR-DU07) PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*3, output
SPECIFICATIONS
terminal option monitor*3, option fitting status monitor*4, and terminal assignment status*4.
Parameter Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/
unit Fault record
cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.
(FR-PU07)
Interactive
Function (help) for operation guide and troubleshooting*4
guidance
8
151
Common specifications
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration/stop,
overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration/stop,
inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous
power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss*5, stall prevention stop, output side earth (ground)
Protective fault overcurrent, output short circuit, output phase loss, external thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor
function operation*5, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection*5, retry count excess*5, CPU fault, operation
Protective/ panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess*5,
warning function inrush current limit circuit fault, communication fault (inverter), analog input fault, PID signal fault*5, internal
circuit fault (15V power supply), brake transistor alarm detection*1, loss of synchronism detection*6,
overspeed occurrence*5*6.
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm*5,
Warning function electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*3*5, parameter write error, copy
operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy warning, password locked *5
Surrounding air temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Environment
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature*7 -20°C to 65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s 2 or less *8 at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
*1 This function is only available for 75K or higher. *5 This protective function is not available in the initial status.
*2 This function is only available under general-purpose motor control. *6 This function is available only when an IPM motor is connected.
*3 This can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07). *7 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
*4 This can be displayed only on the option parameter unit (FR-PU07). *8 2.9m/s2 or less for 185K or higher.
152
Outline dimension drawings
8.3 Outline dimension drawings

8.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings
FR-F720P-0.75K, 1.5K
7.5
2-φ6 hole
245
260
6
95 5
7.5
110 D
Inverter Model D D1
FR-F720P-0.75K 110 21
FR-F720P-1.5K 125 36
D1
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F720P-2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K

 FR-F740P-0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
7.5
*
2-φ6 hole
245
260
6
7.5
125 5
150 140
SPECIFICATIONS
* The FR-F740P-0.75K to 2.2K are

not provided with cooling fans.
45.5
144
(Unit: mm)
8
153
 FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K, 15K

 FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K, 15K, 18.5K
7.5
2-φ6 hole
H1
H
7.5
6 10
195 D
220
Inverter Model H H1 D D1
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K
260 245 170 84
FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720P-15K
300 285 190 101.5
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
D1
211 (Unit: mm)
 FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K, 30K

 FR-F740P-22K, 30K
10
2-φ10 hole
380
400
10
10 10.5
230 190
250
* The FR-F720P-30K is
not provided with a
101.5
wiring cover.
250
(Unit: mm)
154
 FR-F720P-37K, 45K, 55K

 FR-F740P-37K, 45K, 55K
2-φd hole
H2
550
H1
10
W2 3.2
W1 D
W
Inverter Model W W1 W2 H1 H2 d D
FR-F720P-37K
325 270 10 530 10 10 195
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F720P-45K, 55K
435 380 12 525 15 12 250
FR-F740P-45K, 55K
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F740P-75K, 90K
2-φ12 hole  DC reactor supplied

15
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1 P P1, P
H 10
H1
H1
H
W1 4-installation hole
W 2 (for M6 screw) Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
10
12 3.2
W1 D
W DC reactor Mass
W W1 H H1 D
Model (kg)
Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D
SPECIFICATIONS
FR-HEL-H75K
140 120 320 295 185 16
FR-F740P-75K 435 380 550 525 250 (FR-F740P-75K)
FR-F740P-90K 465 400 620 595 300 FR-HEL-H90K
150 130 340 310 190 20
(FR-F740P-90K)
(Unit: mm)
8
155
 FR-F740P-110K
 DC reactor supplied
15
2-φ12 hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1 P1
10
10
310
340
620
595
P
P
130 4-installation hole

150 (for M6 screw) Within 195
(for M6 screw)
Mass
DC reactor Model
400 3.2 (kg)
10
465 300 FR-HEL-H110K(FR-F740P-110K) 22
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F720P-75K, 90K, 110K

 FR-F740P-132K, 160K
15
2-φ12 hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
715
740
P1 P1
H1 10
H 10
P
P
400 3.2 W1 4-installation hole

10
465 360 W 2 (for S screw) Within D

(for M6 screw)
Mass
DC reactor Model W W1 H H1 D S
(kg)
FR-HEL-75K(FR-F720P-75K) 150 130 340 310 190 M6 17
FR-HEL-90K(FR-F720P-90K) 150 130 340 310 200 M6 19
FR-HEL-110K(FR-F720P-110K) 175 150 400 365 200 M8 20
FR-HEL-H132K(FR-F740P-132K) 175 150 405 370 200 M8 26
FR-HEL-H160K(FR-F740P-160K) 175 150 405 370 205 M8 28
(Unit: mm)
156
 FR-F740P-185K, 220K
3-φ12 hole
15
1010
985
12 3.2
10
49 200 200 49 380

498
450
148.5
214.5
185
Rating plate
2-M6 eye nut (only for FR-HEL-H220K)
2-terminal (for M12 bolt)
P1 P1
370 10
405 10
P
P
150 1 4-installation hole

175 2 (for M8 screw) Within 240
(for M6 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.

SPECIFICATIONS
Mass
DC reactor Model
(kg)
FR-HEL-H185K (FR-F740P-185K) 29
FR-HEL-H220K (FR-F740P-220K) 30
(Unit: mm)
8
157
 FR-F740P-250K, 280K, 315K

3-φ12 holes
1010
984
12 3.2
300 300 380
680
148
S/L2 N/- P/+

R/L1 V
T/L3 P1 U W
214
185
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)
P1 P1
H1 10
H 10
P
P
W1 1 4-installation hole
W 2 (for S screw) Within D
(for M8 screw)
Mass
DC reactor Model W W1 H H1 D S 
(kg)
FR-HEL-H250K(FR-F740P-250K) 190 165 440 400 250 M8 M12 35
FR-HEL-H280K(FR-F740P-280K) 190 165 440 400 255 M8 M16 38
FR-HEL-H315K(FR-F740P-315K) 210 185 495 450 250 M10 M16 42
(Unit: mm)
158
 FR-F740P-355K, 400K
3-φ12 hole
1300
1330
12
315 315 4.5 4.5
790 440
R/L1 T/L3 P1 U W
194
S/L2 N/- P/+ V

222
185
 DC reactor supplied  DC reactor supplied

Rating plate
Rating plate 2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
2-M8 eye nut
4- 15 hole
2-terminal (for M16 bolt)
P1
P1
P1 P1
10
10
450 10
495 10
455
500
P 40
P P
P
75
40
E
E
210 (for M10 screw) Within 250 195 4-installation hole
Earth (ground) terminal 220 (for M10 screw)
Within 250
(for M8 screw)
Within 235
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)

Mass
DC reactor Model Mass
(kg) DC reactor Model
SPECIFICATIONS
(kg)
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-F740P-355K) 46
FR-HEL-H400K (FR-F740P-400K) 50
(Unit: mm)
8
159
 FR-F740P-450K, 500K, 560K

4-φ12 hole
1550
1580
12 4.5 4.5
300 300 300 440
995
950
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P1 P/+ U V W

189
227
185
 DC reactor supplied  DC reactor supplied

Rating plate
Rating plate
2-terminal 2-M8 eye nut
4- 15 hole
40
P1
P1
P1 2-terminal
4- 15 hole
10
10
455
500

P (for M12 screw)
E * Remove the eye nut after

40 installation of the product.
P
Within 245 75
P
75
40
40 2-M12 eye nut

P P1
E

220 (for M10 screw)
Within 270
Within H
Within 240
(for M8 screw)
Mass D1 10
DC reactor Model 150 4-installation hole
(kg) 215
(for M10 screw)
D 10
FR-HEL-H450K(FR-F740P-450K) 57
Mass
DC reactor Model H D D1
(kg)
FR-HEL-H500K (FR-F740P-500K) 345 455 405 67
FR-HEL-H560K (FR-F740P-560K) 360 460 410 85
(Unit: mm)
160
 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cutting dimension drawing>

120 or more *
Panel
FR-DU07 27.8 Parameter unit connection
3.2max cable (FR-CB2 )
3 21 (option)
6
44
44
50
Air-
22
bleeding
hole
20
3
16 2-M3 screw 72
3 72 3 Operation panel connection connector
78 25 (FR-ADP option)
81
* Denotes the space required to connect an optional
parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2). When
using another cable, leave the space required for the
cable specification.
(Unit: mm)
 Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cutting dimension drawing>

25.05
(14.2) (11.45)
83
2.5
40 40
*1
*1 Air-bleeding
hole
50
51
4-R1
*1 *1
135
67
56.8
57.8
26.5 26.5 4-φ4 hole

(Effective depth of
the installation
screws hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
80.3
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for
fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with
M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screw hole.
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
8
161
Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM
motor [MM-EFS (1500r/min) series]

[MM-EFS (1500r/min) series]
Motor specification
200V class
Motor MM-EFS1M
7 15 22 37 55 75 11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K
model 400V class
MM-EFS1M4
200V class
Compatible FR-F720P-K
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
inverter 400V class
FR-F740P-K
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
characteristic
*1 Rated torque (Nm) 4.77 9.55 14 23.6 35 47.7 70 95.5 118 140 191 236 286 350
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 2250
Number of poles 6 8
Maximum torque 120% 60s
Frame number 80M 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 225S
Moment of inertia (10-4kgm2) 20 40 55 110 275 280 760 770 1700 1700 1900 3400 3850 6500
Rated 200V class 3 6.0 8.2 13.4 20 27 40 54 66 79 110 128 157 194
current (A) 400V class 1.5 3.0 4.1 6.7 10 13.5 20 27 33 39.5 55 64 78.5 97
Structure Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor. With steel framed legs. (protective structure IP44 *2)
Insulation class F class
Vibration class V-15
Surrounding air
temperature and -10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Storage temperature
Environment -20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
and humidity
Atmosphere Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Altitude Maximum 1,000m above sea level
Vibration 4.9m/s2
Mass(kg) 11 15 22 31 50 53 95 100 135 155 215 230 285
*1 The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter. (Refer to page 149.)
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
*2 This excludes the part where the axis passes through.
Motor torque characteristic

The following figure shows the torque characteristic of the premium high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-EFS (1500r/min)
series] when used with an inverter.
140
Short time (60s) maximum torque
120 83.3%
100 (100% reference torque at 1800r/min rating)
Torque[%]
80 80%
66.7%
60 Continuous operation
40 torque
20
0
150 2100
0 300 500 900 1200 1500 1800 2250
Speed [r/min]
REMARKS
· The motor can also be used for applications which require the rated speed of 1800r/min.
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200VAC or
400VAC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150r/min or less.
162
Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM
motor [MM-THE4 (1500r/min) series]

[MM-THE4 (1500r/min) series]
Motor specification
Motor type MM-THE4
Voltage class 200V 400V
FR-F720P-K FR-F740P-K
Applicable inverter
75 75 90 110 132 160
Continuous Rated output (kW) 75 75 90 110 132 160
characteristic *1 Rated torque (Nm) 477 477 573 700 840 1018
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 1800
Number of poles 6
Frame number 250MA 250MA 250MD 280MD
Moment of inertia (10-4kgm2) 6000 6000 10000 17500 20500 23250
Rated current (A) 270 135 170 195 230 280
Structure Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor. With molded frame legs. (protective structure IP44)
Insulation class F class
Vibration class V-25
Surrounding air temperature
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
and humidity
Storage temperature and
-20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Environment
Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas,
Atmosphere
flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Vibration 4.9m/s2
Mass (kg) 470 470 610 780 810 860
*1 Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.

The following figure shows the torque characteristic of a premium high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-THE4 (1500r/min)
series] when used with an inverter.
140
Short-time (60s) maximum torque
120
100
Torque[%]
80
60
Continuous operation
40 torque
20
0
150
0 300 500 900 1200 1500 1800
Speed [r/min]
REMARKS
 The motor can also be used for applications where the rated speed is 1800r/min.
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200V AC or
400V AC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150r/min or less.
SPECIFICATIONS
8
163
Specification of high-efficiency IPM
motor [MM-EF (1800r/min) series]
8.6 Specification of high-efficiency IPM motor

[MM-EF (1800r/min) series]
Motor specification
200V class
— —
Motor MM-EF2
4 7 15 22 37 55 75 11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K
model 400V class
90K 110K
MM-EF24
200V class
— —
Compatible FR-F720P-K
0.75 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
inverter 400V class
90 110
FR-F740P-K
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
characteristic
*1 Rated torque (Nm) 2.12 3.98 7.96 11.7 19.6 29.2 39.8 58.4 79.6 98.1 117 159 196 239 292 398 477 584
Rated speed (r/min) 1800 (90Hz) 1800 (120Hz)
2400
Maximum speed (r/min) 2700 (135Hz) 2700 (180Hz)
(160Hz)
Number of poles 6 8
Frame number 80M 90L 100L 112M 132S 160M 160L 180L 200L 225S
-4 2
Moment of inertia (10 kgm ) 10.4 10.4 18.4 36.9 51.2 125 153 274 354 815 1050 2215 2400 4300 5200 8700 9500
Rated 200V class 1.6 3.0 5.9 8.7 14.4 22 29 43 55 70.5 83.5 109 136 162 195 272 — —
current (A) 400V class 0.8 1.5 3.0 4.4 7.2 11 14.5 21.5 27.5 35 42 57 68 81 96.5 136 160 197
Structure Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor (protective structure IP44 *2)
Insulation class B class F class
Surrounding air
humidity
Environment
Storage
humidity
Atmosphere Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Vibration 4.9m/s2(0.5G)
Mass(kg) 8.5 9.0 11 15 23 33 38 52 60 105 105 119 167 178 240 290 360 390
*1 The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter. (Refer to page 149.)
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
*2 This excludes the part where the axis passes through.

The following figures show the torque characteristics of high-efficiency IPM motors [MM-EF (1800r/min) series] when
used with inverters.
75K or lower 90K or higher

140 140
120 120
Short time(60s) maximum Short time(60s) maximum
100 100 torque
torque
Torque[%]
90%
Torque[%]
80 80% 80 75%
66.7% 60
60 Continuous operation Continuous operation
40 torque 40 torque
20 20
0 0
180 180
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400
Speed [r/min] Speed[r/min]
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200VAC or
400VAC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 180r/min or less.
164
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
8.7 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure

When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by
installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure,
etc., this installation method is recommended.
8.7.1 When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)

For the FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740P-0.75K to 160K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a
heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). (Attachment is not required when protruding the heatsink for 185K or
higher.) For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-
A7CN) to the inverter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)".
8.7.2 Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740P-185K or higher

(1) Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
 FR-F740P-185K, 220K  FR-F740P-250K, 280K, 315K
6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw
484 662
200 200
13
300 300
15
954
985
Hole
984
954
Hole
18
15
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F740P-355K, 400K  FR-F740P-450K, 500K, 560K
771 6-M10 screw 976 8-M10 screw

300 300 300
21
315 315
21
1550
1508
Hole
1300
1258
Hole
SPECIFICATIONS
21
21
(Unit: mm) (Unit: mm)
8
165
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
(2) Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame

 FR-F740P-185K to 315K
Shift
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower Upper
part of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installa- installation
frame
tion frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the front
side as shown on the right. When changing the installation
frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.
Lower
installation
Shift frame
 FR-F740P-355K or higher
Removal
Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower
Upper installation
parts of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on frame (rear side)
the upper and lower side of the inverter as shown on the right.
Lower installation
frame (rear side)
Removal
(3) Installation of the inverter

Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower instal-
lation frame.
Enclosure * For the FR-F740P-185K or higher, there are finger
Inside the guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the
enclosure Exhausted air thickness of the panel should be less than 10mm(*1)
and also do not place anything around finger guards
* to avoid contact with the finger guards.
Enclosure
Inverter
10* 1
140
Installation Finger guard
frame
6
(Unit: mm)
Inverter Model D1(mm)

Dimension of FR-F740P-185K, 220K 185
Cooling
wind the outside of FR-F740P-250K to 560K 184
D1 the enclosure
CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water
drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
166
For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series
(1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.)
2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.)
3)Plug-in options of the F500 series are not compatible
4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) cannot be used.
5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP) cannot be used.
(2) Wiring instructions
1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-F700P series without removing wiring.
Note that the wiring cover (0.75K to 22K) is not compatible.
FR-F500 series
FR-F700P series
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-F700P series cannot be used with the FR-F500
series terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit)
1) For the FR-F700P series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the
parameter name and setting range are not displayed. Parameter list, change list, initial value list, initial value list
2 and parameter clear of the HELP function cannot be used.
2) For the FR-F700P series, many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all faults
are displayed as "Fault 14". When the faults history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added faults display will
not appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting cannot be used.
4) User registration/clear (user group 2) cannot be used.
5) Parameter copy/verification function cannot be used.
167
For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
(4) Main differences and compatibilities with the FR-F500(L) series
Item FR-F500(L) FR-F700P

Simple mode
61 parameters 17 parameters
parameter
User group (16 parameters) only
User group 1 (16 parameters), User group 2 (16
Changed
User group Setting methods were partially changed

function
parameters) (Pr.160, Pr.173 to Pr.175)

(Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.173)
Performing the parameter clear or all parameter clear Performing the parameter clear or all parameter clear
Communication (H5A96 or HAA99) from the DeviceNet (H5A96 or HAA99) from the DeviceNet
option communication option (FR-A5ND) clears the Pr. 345 communication option (FR-A7ND) does not clear the
and Pr. 346 settings. Pr. 345 and Pr. 346 settings.
2% for 11K to 37K, 1.5% for 45K and 55K
initial value
Changed
(If the torque boost setting was being used in the

Pr.0
2% for 11K to 55K initial setting in the FR-F500 series, the setting does
Torque boost
not need to be changed from the initial setting after
the inverter is replaced with the FR-F700P series. )
User initial Not available
value setting Available Substitutable with the copy function of the operation
(Pr.199) panel (FR-DU07)
Not available
DC injunction With a terminal (X13 signal)
Start in the reverse rotation is possible with the flying
function with (Setting value "8888" for Pr.11, setting value "13" for
start function (frequency search of the automatic
terminal Pr.180 to Pr.186)
restart after instantaneous power failure function)
function
Deleted
Setting is not necessary

Long wire mode Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr.240
(Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr.240 are deleted.)
Intelligent Not available
optimum Available For deceleration time, overvoltage fault can be
acceleration/ (Pr.60 setting "3" and Pr.61 to Pr.63) avoided with the regeneration avoidance function
deceleration (Pr.882 to Pr.885).
Automatic The automatic torque boost is deleted because the
Pr.38, Pr.39
torque boost Simple magnetic flux vector (Pr.80) has been added.
Removable terminal block
Terminal block Removable terminal block Upward compatibility (Terminal block of the F500 can
be mounted)
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
PU FR-PU04, DU04
FR-DU04 unavailable (Partly restricted when the FR-
PU04 is used. Refer to page 167.)
Dedicated plug-in option (not compatible)
Computer link, relay output option Built into the inverter
Plug-in option
FR-A5NR (RS-485 terminal, relay output 2 points)
Three boards can be mounted One board can be mounted
FR-F720P-0.75K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 7.5K, 18.5K, 22K, 37K, 45K,
Installation size FR-F740P-0.75K to 3.7K, 7.5K, 11K, 22K, 37K to 55K are compatible in mounting dimensions
For other capacities, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100 <EXCELENT> series

Instructions for installation
• When using the installation holes of the FR-A100(E) series, FR-A5AT (intercompatibility attachment) is necessary.
168
Appendix 2 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives
The EU Directives are issued to standardize different national regulations of the EU Member States and to facilitate free movement of the
equipment, whose safety is ensured, in the EU territory.
Since 1996, compliance with the EMC Directive that is one of the EU Directives has been legally required. Since 1997, compliance with the
Low Voltage Directive, another EU Directive, has been also legally required. When a manufacturer confirms its equipment to be compliant
with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, the manufacturer must declare the conformity and affix the CE marking.
 The authorized representative in the EU

The authorized representative in the EU is shown below.
Name: Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.
Address: Gothaer Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany
 Note
We declare that this inverter conforms with the EMC Directive in industrial environments and affix the CE marking on the inverter. When
using the inverter in a residential area, take appropriate measures and ensure the conformity of the inverter used in the residential area.
(1) EMC Directive

We declare that this inverter conforms with the EMC Directive and affix the CE marking on the inverter.
 EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC
 Standard(s): EN61800-3:2004 (Second environment / PDS Category "C3")
Note: First environment

Environment including residential buildings. Includes buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power
supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Second environment
Environment including all buildings except buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power supply
network which supplies power to residential buildings.
 Note
Set the EMC filter valid and install the inverter and perform wiring according to the following instructions.
* The inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter. Set the EMC filter valid. (The EMC filter is invalid when shipped from the factory. (The
FR-F720P-0.75K and 1.5K are always valid.) For details, refer to page 10.)
* Connect the inverter to an earthed power supply.
* Install a motor and a control cable according to the instructions written in the EMC Installation Guidelines (BCN-A21041-204 (For the
manual, please contact your sales representative.) ).
* The cable length between the inverter and the motor is 5 m maximum.
* Confirm that the final integrated system with the inverter conforms with the EMC Directive.
* This inverter does not conform with the EU Directives when used with an IPM motor.
169
(2) Low Voltage Directive
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive (Conforming standard EN 50178) and affix the CE
mark on the inverters.
Outline of instructions
* Do not use an earth leakage current breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. Connect the
equipment to the earth securely.
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
* Use the cable sizes on page 14 under the following conditions.
 Surrounding air temperature: 40°C maximum
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to EN60204 Appendix C TABLE 5.
* Use a tinned (plating should not include zinc) crimping terminal to connect the earth (ground) cable. When tightening the screw, be
careful not to damage the threads.
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable whose size is indicated on page 14.
* Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.
* When using an earth leakage current breaker, use a residual current operated protective device (RCD) of type B (breaker which can
detect both AC and DC). If not, provide double or reinforced insulation between the inverter and other equipment, or put a transformer
between the main power supply and inverter.
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II (usable regardless of the earth (ground) condition of the power supply),
overvoltage category III (usable with the earthed-neutral system power supply, 400V class only) and pollution degree 2 or lower
specified in IEC60664.
 To use the inverter of 37K or higher (IP00) under the conditions of pollution degree 2, install it in the enclosure of IP 2X or higher.
 To use the inverter under the conditions of pollution degree 3, install it in the enclosure of IP54 or higher.
 To use the inverter of 30K or lower (IP20) outside of an enclosure in the environment of pollution degree 2, fix a fan cover with fan
cover fixing screws enclosed.
Fan cover Fan cover

Fan cover fixing screw
fixing screw fixing screws
Fan cover Fan cover Fan cover
Fan Fan
Fan
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K FR-F720P-7.5K to 15K FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K

FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K FR-F740P-7.5K to 18.5K FR-F740P-22K, 30K
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (Relay output has basic
isolation from the inverter internal circuit.)
* Control circuit terminals on page 9 are safely isolated from the main circuit.
* Environment
During Operation In Storage During Transportation
Surrounding air
-10°C to +50°C -20°C to +65°C -20°C to +65°C
temperature
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less 90% RH or less 90% RH or less
Maximum altitude 1000m 1000m 10000m
* This inverter does not conform with the EU Directives when used with an IPM motor.
170
Appendix 3 Instructions for UL and cUL compliance
(Standard to comply with: UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No.14)
(1) General Precaution
CAUTION - Risk of Electric Shock -
The bus capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than 10 minutes,
and check for residual voltage between terminal P/+ and N/- with a meter etc., to avoid a hazard of electrical shock.
ATTENTION - Risque de choc électrique -
La durée de décharge du condensateur de bus est de 10 minutes. Avant de commencer le câblage ou l’inspection, mettez l’appareil
hors tension et attendez plus de 10 minutes.
(2) Environment
Before installation, check that the environment meets following specifications.
Enclosure
Measurement
position
Surrounding air Inverter
Constant torque: -10°C to + 50°C Maximum (non-freezing) 5cm 5cm
temperature *1
Measurement 5cm
position
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature -20°C to + 65°C
Ambience Indoors (No corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)
Altitude, vibration Below 1000m, 5.9m/s2 or less *2at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
*1 Surrounding Air Temperature is a temperature measured at a measurement position in an enclosure.
Ambient Temperature is a temperature outside an enclosure.
*2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 185K or more
(3) Installation
The below types of inverter have been approved as products for use in enclosure and approval tests were conducted under the
following conditions. Design the enclosure so that the surrounding air temperature, humidity and ambience of the inverter will satisfy
the above specifications.
Branch Circuit Protection
For installation in the United States, Class RK5, Class J, Class CC, Class L, Class T or any faster acting fuses or UL
489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any
applicable local codes.
For installation in Canada, Class RK5, Class J, Class CC, Class L, Class T or any faster acting fuses or UL 489 Molded
Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable
provincial codes.
For the FR-F740P-75K to 560K, Class RK5, Class J, Class CC, Class L or Class T fuses or UL 489 Molded Case
Circuit Breaker (MCCB) must be provided.
FR-F720P-K 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated fuse voltage(V) 240V or more
Fuse Without power factor
improving reactor 15 20 30 40 60 80 150 175 200 225 300 350 400 500
maximum
allowable With power factor
rating (A)* improving reactor 15 20 20 30 50 70 125 150 200 200 250 300 350 400
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)* 15 15 20 35 50 70 100 125 175 200 250 350 400 500
FR-F720P-K 75 90 110
improving reactor   
maximum
rating (A)* improving reactor 500 600 700
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 700 800 1000
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
FR-F740P-K 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55

Fuse Without power factor 6 10 15 20 30 40 70 80 90 110 150 175 200 250
maximum improving reactor
rating (A)* improving reactor 6 10 10 15 25 35 60 70 90 100 125 150 175 200
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 15 15 15 15 25 40 50 70 80 100 125 175 200 250
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
171
FR-F740P-K 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560
improving reactor               
maximum
rating (A)* improving reactor 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1350 1500 1800
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)* 350 450 500 650 800 800 1000 1200 1200 1200 1600 1600 2000 2000 2500
* Maximum allowable rating by US National Electrical Code.
Exact size must be chosen for each installation.
(4) Wiring of the power supply and motor

For wiring the input (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and output (U, V, W) terminals of the inverter, use the UL Listed copper, stranded
wires (rated at 75°C) and round crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool recommended
by the terminal maker.
(5) Short circuit ratings

 200V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 264V Maximum.
 400V class
55K or lower
75K or higher
(6) Motor overload protection
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the rated motor current to Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic This function detects the overload (overheat) of the
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of Pr. 9 = 100% setting motor, stops the operation of the inverter's output
inverter rating*1.2 of inverter rating*1.2
transistor, and stops the output. (The operation
Operation time (min)
(min) unit display in
70
30Hz
30Hz or more* characteristic is shown on the left) 3
 When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor

this range
or more* 20Hz Operation range 3
60
20Hz
10Hz
10Hz Range on the right of
characteristic curve 1) Set "1" in Pr. 71. (This provides a 100% continuous torque
6Hz
6Hz
0.5Hz
Non-operation range
Range on the left of characteristic in the low-speed range.)
50 0.5Hz characteristic curve 2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay
240
(s) unit display in this range
function for motor

protection is turned OFF
Operation time (s)
(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))

180
120 *1 When 50% of the rated inverter output current (current value) is set
in Pr. 9
Electronic thermal relay *2 The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current.
60 function for transistor
protection It is not the percentage to the rated motor current.
52.5% 105% *3 When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies
50 100 120 150
Inverter output current (%) to operation at 6Hz or higher.
(% to the rated output current)
CAUTION
 The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal
input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
 When using multiple motors with one inverter, or using a multi-pole motor or a specialized motor, provide an external thermal
relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. And for the setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current to the
current value on the motor rating plate. For low-speed operation where the cooling capability of the motor reduces, it is
recommended to use a thermal protector or thermistor-incorporated motor.
 When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
 Motor over temperature sensing is not provided by the drive.
The use of FR-F700P with an IPM motor is not certified by the UL nor cUL.
172
MEMO
173
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Revision

Manual Number
Sep. 2010 IB(NA)-0600411ENG-A First edition
May 2011 IB(NA)-0600411ENG-B Addition
 MM-EFS71M4 to 55K1M4
 Setting value "210" for Pr. 71 Applied motor
 Setting values "12 and 112" for Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization
 Setting value "12" for IPM IPM parameter initialization
 Compliance with the Radio Waves Act (South Korea)
Feb. 2015 IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C Addition
 MM-EFS 200V class compatibility
 Overspeed detection (E.OS) function
 Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall
prevention operation
 MM-THE4 75kW to 160kW
 Pr.552 Frequency jump range
Modification
 Rated current of MM-EFS151M(4) to MM-EFS371M(4)
For Maximum Safety

• Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to
install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product
are likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.
174 IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C
INVERTER
FR-F700P
FR-F700P
FR-F720P-0.75K to 110K
FR-F740P-0.75K to 560K
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (Basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
1 OUTLINE ........................................................................................................1
1
INVERTER
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ......................................................................3
3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> .............................................................40
4 DRIVING THE MOTOR ................................................................................45 2

5 ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................70
6 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................................115
3
700P
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION......................140
8 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................149
5
For the customers intending to use IPM motors ......... 40
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial settings.
For use with an IPM motor, refer to page 40.
6
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN To obtain the Instruction Manual (Applied)
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction
Manual (Applied) [IB-0600412ENG].
The Instruction Manual (Applied) is separately available from where you
7
FR-F700P
MODEL
purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi sales representative.
MODEL The PDF version of this manual is also available for download at "Mitsubishi
1A2-P39 Electric FA site," the Mitsubishi Electric FA network service on the world wide
CODE
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C(1502)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

web (URL: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa/)
8
C

Ib 0600411 Engc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ib 0600411 Engc

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ib 0600411 Engc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INVERTER

3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> .............................................................40

4 DRIVING THE MOTOR ................................................................................45 2

IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C(1502)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

This section is specifically about safety matters

(7) Disposing of the inverter

2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3

2.1 Peripheral devices...................................................................................................... 4

3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> 40

3.1 Setting procedure of IPM motor control <IPM>.................................................... 40

4 DRIVING THE MOTOR 45

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07) ..................................................................................... 45

5.1 Simple mode parameter list......................................................................................70

7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 140

7.1 Inspection item ....................................................................................................... 140

8.1 Rating ..................................................................................................................... 149

Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model

The following marks are used to indicate the controls as below.

Mark Control method Applied motor (control)

<Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual>

Harmonic suppression guideline

RS-485 terminals PU connector

wiring cover FR-F720P-5.5K

 Accessory · DC reactor supplied (75K or higher)

7.5K to 15K M4 40 2

7.5K to 18.5K M4 40 2

 SERIAL number check

1.2 Step of operation

Frequency command Wiring of the power {Refer to page 11}

Connect a switch, relay, etc.

Set from the Change frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency

Set from the Change of frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency

Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover

Front cover Front cover

Front cover Front cover

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions

Refer to the cleara

 Install the inverter under the following conditions.

Measurement 55K or lower 75K or higher

Temperature: -10°C to 50°C

Vibration(5.9m/s2 * or more at 10 to Horizontal placement

Vertical mounting Transportation by Oil mist, flammable

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Selection of automatic restart CS PTC SE Open collector output common

2.4.2 EMC filter

5.5K or lower 15K or higher

FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K FR-F720P-15K FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K FR-F720P-37K or higher

EMC filter Disengage connector fixing tab. With tab disengaged,

2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU and MT-

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

FR-F720P-0.75K, 1.5K FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K

R1/L11 S1/L21 N/- P/+ PX

FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K FR-F720P-15K